<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<itemContainer xmlns="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5 http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5/omeka-xml-5-0.xsd" uri="https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/items/browse?output=omeka-xml&amp;page=78" accessDate="2026-06-13T05:41:41+01:00">
  <miscellaneousContainer>
    <pagination>
      <pageNumber>78</pageNumber>
      <perPage>10</perPage>
      <totalResults>3494</totalResults>
    </pagination>
  </miscellaneousContainer>
  <item itemId="2831" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3602">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/04b4873dcc939db047ea81b1f0a79839.pdf</src>
        <authentication>b99c3088b9619e4a1b355ca80ea17e2b</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21995">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

A contrastive analysis approach to the teaching of auxiliary selection in L2
Italian
Dragana RadojeviĤ
Department of Italian
Faculty of Philology
University of Belgrade, Serbia
drradojevic@hotmail.com
Abstract: Auxiliary selection (AS) with those Italian intransitive verbs (IVs) that can use both
essere ‗to be‘ and avere ‗to have‘, but with a change in meaning (e.g. È/Ha corso al parco ‗He
ran to/at the park‘), represents one of the major challenges in the acquisition of Italian as L2. In
this paper we argue that this is so largely because this phenomenon has not been treated
adequately in relevant grammars, dictionaries and textbooks. In order to prove our argument we
present a case study of AS with the IV correre ‗to run‘ involving university students of L2
Italian who are native speakers of Serbian. The results indicate that a contrastive analysis
approach to the teaching of AS with IVs is more efficient than the traditional one, and it is
suggested that it should be used more frequently in order to facilitate the acquisition of AS by
learners of L2 Italian.
Key Words: auxiliary selection, L2 Italian, contrastive analysis

1. Introduction
There are two auxiliary verbs (AVs) used in analytic forms of Italian verbs: essere ‗to be‘ and avere ‗to
have‘. Italian grammars traditionally explain auxiliary selection (AS) in the Active Voice by the verbs‘
(in)transitivity. Namely, all transitive verbs take avere, whereas most intransitive verbs (IVs) take essere.
However, many IVs take avere (e.g. esitare ‗to hesitate‘, tossire ‗to cough‘, divorziare ‗to divorce‘), including
some verbs of motion (e.g. camminare ‗to walk‘, nuotare ‗to swim‘, gattonare ‗to crawl‘). Additionally, some
IVs can take both AVs, but in some cases the AS does not cause any change in meaning (e.g. piovere ‗to rain‘,
nevicare ‗to snow‘), whereas the meaning of others (e.g. correre ‗to run‘, volare ‗to fly‘, saltare ‗to jump‘) is
determined by the selection of one or another AV (e.g. È corso al parco ‗He ran to the park‘, but Ha corso al
parco ‗He ran at the park‘).
As far as the last group of IVs is concerned, in order to explain the differences in meaning caused by the
use of one or another AV, most grammars traditionally just give a small number of unclear examples for both
AVs, with the additional comment that more detailed explanations should be sought in monolingual dictionaries.
However, monolingual dictionaries provide insufficient examples that cannot account for all the different
meanings, and bilingual dictionaries completely neglect the problem of AS with these verbs. Similarly, most L2
Italian textbooks do not take this issue into consideration leading to a low level of learner awareness of the
problem. Therefore, since AS with those Italian IVs that can take both AVs has not been treated adequately in
grammars, dictionaries, and textbooks, this phenomenon represents one of the major challenges in the acquisition
of Italian as L2.
The aim of this paper is to present a case study proving that a contrastive analysis approach to the
teaching of AS with the described Italian IVs is more efficient than the traditional one, and consequently to
suggest that it should be used more frequently in order to facilitate the acquisition of this phenomenon by
learners of L2 Italian.

2. Auxiliary selection in grammars, dictionaries and textbooks
In RadojeviĤ (to appear) we analysed the most important grammars, dictionaries and textbooks of
Italian as L2, usually used by learners in Serbia, in order to investigate to what extent and in what way AS of the
IV correre ‗to run‘, as a representative of its group, is described in them. In this chapter we will give a brief
overview of our findings and conclusions.

2.1. Auxiliary selection in Italian grammars
Italian grammars differ from each other in that most of them completely neglect the problem of AS,
while among those that deal with this phenomenon some of them traditionally do it very superficially and
without success, whereas others give more precise and thorough explanations.

377

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
An important step for the explanation of this problem was made by Jernej (1965: 200; 1999: 94), who
explicitly put the IV correre among those verbs that can take both complements expressing motion towards or
from a place, and those expressing motion at or inside a place. However, he failed to emphasise the way in which
that distinction affects the AS, i.e. that correre takes essere to express motion towards or from a place, and avere
in order to express motion at or inside a place.
The most systematic and thorough approach was applied by Salvi &amp; Vanelli (2004: 50, 52), who
introduced Aktionsart‘s categories into their explanation of the AS. They claim that correre takes avere when it
is intransitive, durative, continuous, and atelic, whereas it takes essere when it is unaccusative, non-durative,
resultative, and atelic.69 In RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 2.2.5) we argued that their durative vs. non-durative
and telic vs. atelic distinctions could be very useful for the contrastive approach to the teaching of L2 Italian to
native speakers of Serbian because of the fact that the same distinctions exist in Serbian. Namely, on the basis of
their distinctions we claimed that the Serbian equivalent of correre with avere is only the verb trčati ‗to run‘,
whereas the corresponding equivalents of correre with essere are different prefixed derivatives of trčati (e.g.
utrčati ‗to run into‘, istrčati ‗to run out‘ etc.), but not trčati itself. Although Salvi &amp; Vanelli made a considerable
contribution to the explanation of AS with correre, they still failed to place sufficient emphasis on the
importance of the type of motion and the complement of place that influence the phenomenon of AS, which
would have made their contribution more complete.
However, the most precise explanation of the AS with correre was provided by Maiden &amp; Robustelli
(2004: 266-267), who were the first to explicitly introduce the concept of change of location, as that expressed
by the AV essere with correre, into the explanation of AS. In RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 2.2.8) we suggested
a completion of their explanation by introducing the concept of motion at a location as that expressed by the AV
avere with correre. Although they are not expressed by AVs as they are in Italian, both concepts still exist in
Serbian, where they are marked by the distinction between the bare verb and its prefixed derivatives, as
described in the previous paragraph, as well as by different cases in prepositional phrases (PPs) even with the
same preposition. Namely, many Italian PPs expressing space can have two Serbian equivalents, e.g. al parco
can mean both u park ‗to the park‘ (accusative – change of location) and u parku ‗at the park‘ (locative – motion
at a location), depending only on the AV used with correre.70
Therefore, the conclusion is that the introduction of the concept of motion at a location, as well as the
aforementioned contrastive remarks, finally shed some light on the explanation of AS with those Italian verbs
that can take both AVs, but with a change in meaning, thus making it complete and clear.

2.2. Auxiliary selection in Italian dictionaries
An analysis of the following monolingual Italian dictionaries: Zingarelli (2010), Garzanti italiano
(2009), Devoto–Oli (2007), Sabatini–Coletti (2005), and De Mauro (2000) showed that all of them provide every
meaning of correre with the respective AV, but they do not pay enough attention to adequate complements of
place nor do they insist sufficiently on the distinction between the different types of motion (change of location
and motion at a location) affecting the AS. Therefore, their explanations and examples are neither complete nor
clear-cut for learners of Italian as L2.
Bilingual Italian-Serbian (Klajn, 1996) and Italian-Croatian or Serbian (DeanoviĤ–Jernej, 1984)
dictionaries completely neglect the problem of AS. Although we are aware of the lack of space in dictionaries, in
RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 3.2) we suggested that they should take into account this problem with all Italian
verbs and especially with IVs that can take both AVs, but with a change in meaning, and that they should
illustrate them with adequate simple examples, which would facilitate the acquisition of this phenomenon by
Serbian learners of L2 Italian.

2.3. Auxiliary selection in L2 Italian textbooks
Most L2 Italian textbooks treat the problem of AS in general very superficially and completely ignore
the AS with IVs like correre. An analysis of: Balí &amp; Rizzo (2002, 2003), Bidetti, Dominici &amp; Piccolo (2009),
Chiappini &amp; De Filippo (2002, 2005), Marin (2008), Marin &amp; Magnelli (2007, 2008a, 2008b, 2009), Mazzetti,
Falcinelli &amp; Servadio (2002, 2003), Mezzadri &amp; Balboni (2000a, 2000b, 2001a, 2001b, 2002a, 2002b),
Chiappini &amp; De Filippo (2002), Ziglio &amp; Rizzo (2001), and StojkoviĤ &amp; Zavińin (2010), which are the most
frequently used L2 Italian textbooks in Serbia from level A1 to C1, showed that the AS with the IV correre
occurred only five times.71 We consider this fact to be a crucial contributory factor in the unsatisfactory
awareness of the problem in learners of L2 Italian, because textbooks are the learners‘ primary source of
69

For more details see Salvi &amp; Vanelli (2004: 50, 52).
For more details about other relevant grammars see RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 2).
71
For a more detailed analysis of these examples see RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 4).
70

378

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
information, whereas grammars and dictionaries are often only occasionally consulted and not always available
to the majority of learners.72

3. Case study
3.1. Participants
In order to prove our arguments we conducted an experiment involving eighty students from the Italian
Department of the University of Belgrade, Faculty of Philology, who are native speakers of Serbian. They were
divided into four groups that consisted of twenty students belonging to the same undergraduate year of study. At
the time the experiment was conducted the first year students had already reached the A1 level of the Common
European Framework of Reference for Languages (CEFR) and they were heading towards the A2 level, the
second year A2 towards B1, the third year B1 towards B2, and the fourth year B2 towards C1.

3.2. Input
All the groups had been exposed to the same traditional input regarding auxiliary selection in Italian,
described in 1, during their education, independently of our experiment. However, in addition to the traditional
input the second year group had also been given an explicit contrastive input on two separate occasions one
month before the experiment. The additional input they received focused on the following three points: 1.
correre uses essere to express change of location, whereas it uses avere to express motion at a location; 2. the
Serbian equivalent of correre with avere is trčati, whereas the corresponding equivalents of correre with essere
are different prefixed derivatives of trčati, but not trčati itself; 3. many Italian PPs expressing space can have
two Serbian equivalents, e.g. al parco can mean both u park ‗to the park‘ (accusative – change of location) and u
parku ‗at the park‘ (locative – motion at a location), depending only on the AV used with correre. These
explanations were illustrated by several clear-cut examples in both languages.

3.3. Hypothesis
Consequently, our hypothesis was that the second year group would show significantly better
knowledge of AS in L2 Italian compared to all the other groups since it was the only one that received the type
of input that had taken into account not only the traditional explanation of AS in Italian, but also all the other
relevant criteria important for such a phenomenon (described in 3.2), as well as the corresponding contrastive
explanations and examples, which make AS more transparent to learners of L2 Italian, and, therefore, hopefully
facilitate its acquisition. Among the remaining three groups we expected the fourth one to be the best, the third
one the second best and the first one to be the worst because that order would correspond to their level of L2
Italian. Additionally, we expected the second year group‘s error percentage to be significantly lower compared to
that of the other three groups.

3.4. Experiment
For the purposes of our experiment all the students were given the same test consisting of ten sentences
in Italian that they had to translate into Serbian. The tense used in all the sentences was the Passato Prossimo
(the most frequently used Past Perfect Tense and the first analytic verb form taught to learners of L2 Italian) of
the IV correre: five sentences had the AV essere and five avere. As described in 2.1 and 3.2, the Serbian
equivalent of the Italian IV correre with the AV avere is trčati, whereas the corresponding equivalents of
correre with essere are different prefixed derivatives of trčati. Every correctly translated sentence was assigned
one point so that the maximum was ten points per student.
The correct use of Serbian prepositions and cases expressing space was not assigned any points because
the choice of correct verbs in Serbian logically led to the correct choice of corresponding prepositions and cases,
whereas the use of incorrect verbs necessarily caused the choice of incorrect prepositions and cases. Or, if we
look at it from the other way around, incorrectly understood Italian PPs led to the wrong choice of both verbs
and prepositions and cases in Serbian. Therefore, these points would not have had any effect on the results.

3.5. Results

72

In RadojeviĤ (to appear: Chapter 4) we also gave some suggestions regarding possible ways of representing the problem of
AS with the IV correre in L2 Italian textbooks in order to facilitate its acquisition even at the lowest levels. Future L2 Italian
textbook authors might find them useful.

379

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
The results of the test are shown in the following table and chart. The numbers in the table represent
how many students had the respective number of points, whereas the chart shows the average points of each of
the four years of study.
Year
Points
10
9
8
7
6
5 or less
Average points

I

II

III

IV

6
8
2
2
2
0
8.7

12
6
2
0
0
0
9.5

8
5
4
3
0
0
8.9

10
3
4
3
0
0
9

Generally speaking, all the groups showed a satisfactory knowledge of AS in Italian, the average points
ranging from 8.70 to 9.50 out of 10 points. However, the second year group is significantly better than all the
others, as can be seen in the chart representing the average points. The difference between the second year group
and all the others is even more obvious in the following chart, showing the error percentage for each year of
study.

While the error percentage for the first, second and third year ranges from 10% to 13%, the second year
group‘s error percentage is significantly lower at 5%. This means that out of 200 sentences 20 second year group
students made mistakes only in 10 of them and the remaining 190 were correct (as shown in the chart with the
overall points), whereas the fourth year group students made twice as many mistakes despite there being a
difference of two CEFR levels between them, as mentioned in 3.1.

3.6. Some examples
The distribution of the two AVs in the test was equal, i.e. there were as many sentences with essere as
with avere, as described in 3.4. The error percentage per sentence shows that there were slightly more mistakes
concerning sentences with essere (52.56%) than with avere (47.44%). This means that the students
overgeneralized the Serbian verb trčati and used it even in those contexts where its prefixed derivatives should
have been used in order to correctly translate correre with essere. Generally speaking, in a large number of
translations from Italian into Serbian made by Serbian learners of L2 Italian we have noticed this tendency to
neglect the prefixation of verbs although it is a very productive morphological process in Serbian, but since we
have not conducted any research into that phenomenon yet, we will not make any further claims about it.

In order to illustrate the test, we will show only two sentences in which the students made the largest
number of mistakes:

Italian
Serbian
English

Sentence 1
Ho corso al parco
Trčao sam u parku
I ran at the park

avere
trčati; u + locative
motion at a location

Sentence 2
Sono corso allo stadio
Otrčao sam na stadion
I ran to the stadium

essere
otrčati; na + accusative
change of location

The students‘ mistakes stemmed from the fact that they did not recognize that sentence 1 expressed
motion at a location, so that their translation into Serbian was Otrčao sam u park as if in Italian it were Sono

380

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
corso al parco ‗I ran to the park‘; and similarly in sentence 2 they did not understand the change of location, so
that they translated it as Trčao sam na stadionu as if the original Italian sentence were Ho corso allo stadio ‗I ran
at the stadium‘. Our opinion is that the reasons for these mistakes are twofold. First of all, since in Serbian
different cases are used to mark different types of motion (motion at a location – locative; change of location –
accusative) although both cases can use the same preposition (e.g. u parku, u park), it is logical for our students
to look for the type of motion in the Italian PPs. However, since most Italian PPs do not mark the type of motion,
the students were not able to find it in them, and consequently they were likely to make mistakes. Secondly,
since the first, third and fourth year students had not been exposed to the input suggested in this paper, they were
not used to taking into account the distinctive contrastive features (i.e. that the Serbian equivalent of correre with
avere is trčati, whereas its equivalents with essere are its prefixed derivatives), so they did not look for the type
of motion in the AV used, which would have led them to the correct choice of the respective Serbian verb.

4. Conclusion
On the basis of the results of our experiment we can conclude that our hypothesis was correct. The
second year group had significantly better results compared to all the other groups. Among the remaining three
groups the fourth year group was the best, the third one the second best and the first one was the worst, which
also corresponds to our hypothesis and to their level of L2 Italian. Additionally, the second year group‘s error
percentage was significantly lower compared to that of the other three groups. Our conclusion is that the reasons
for such results are that the second year group was the only one that received the type of input that had taken into
account not only the traditional explanation of AS in Italian, but also all the other relevant criteria important for
such a phenomenon (described in 3.2), as well as the corresponding contrastive explanations and examples. All
these remarks made the AS much clearer to the students and, therefore, facilitated its acquisition.
By taking into account only translations from Italian into Serbian, in this paper we have only examined
the receptive abilities of Serbian learners of L2 Italian concerning the AS of the Italian IV correre. However, for
further investigations we recommend an examination of productive abilities regarding the same problem because
it might lead to some interesting and useful conclusions that could explain the phenomenon in question in greater
depth and make its acquisition by learners of L2 Italian, independently of their mother tongue, much easier and
more efficient. In addition, there are also some other Italian IVs belonging to the same group as correre, as far as
the AS is concerned, such as volare ‗to flow‘ and saltare ‗to jump, that might be interesting for further research
into this subject.

References
Jernej, J. (1965). Grammatica italiana descrittiva: su basi storiche e psicologiche. Bern / Mùnchen: Francke
Verlag.
Jernej, J. (1999). Talijanski jezik: priručnik za viši stupanj. Zagreb: Ńkolska knjiga.
Maiden, M. &amp; Robustelli, C. (2007). A Reference Grammar of Modern Italian. London: Hodder Education.
Salvi, G. e Vanelli, L. (2004). Nuova grammatica italiana. Bologna: Il Mulino.
RadojeviĤ, D. (to appear). Essere ili avere: pitanje je sad. In: Stavovi promjena – promjena stavova. Zbornik
radova (VuĦo, J. &amp; MilatoviĤ, B., eds.). NikńiĤ: Filozofski fakultet.

Dictionaries
Garzanti italiano. (2009). Milano: Garzanti.
DeanoviĤ, M. i Jernej, J. (1984). Talijansko-hrvatski ili srpski rečnik. Zagreb: Ńkolska knjiga.
De Mauro, T. (2000). De Mauro. Il dizionario della lingua italiana. Torino: Paravia Bruno Mondadori.
Devoto, G. e Oli. G. C. (2007). Il Devoto-Oli. Vocabolario della lingua italiana. Firenze: Le Monnier.
Klajn, I. (1996). Italijansko-srpski rečnik. Beograd: Nolit.
Sabatini, F. e Coletti, V. (2005). Il Sabatini Coletti. Dizionario della lingua italiana. Milano: Rizzoli Larousse.
Zingarelli, N. (2010). Lo Zingarelli. Vocabolario della lingua italiana. Bologna: Zanichelli.

381

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Textbooks
Balí, M. e Rizzo, G. (2002). Espresso 2. Corso di italiano: libro dello studente ed esercizi. Firenze: Alma.
Balí, M. e Ziglio, L. (2003). Espresso 3. Corso di italiano: libro dello studente ed esercizi. Firenze: Alma.
Bidetti, A., Dominici, M. e Piccolo, L. (2009). Nuovo progetto italiano 3. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà
italiana: livello intermedio-avanzato (B2-C1). Quaderno degli esercizi. Roma: Edilingua.
Chiappini, L. e De Filippo, N. (2002). Un giorno in Italia 1. Corso di italiano per stranieri: principianti,
elementare, intermedio. Libro dello studente con esercizi. Roma: Bonacci.
Chiappini, L. e De Filippo, N. (2005). Un giorno in Italia 2. Corso di italiano per stranieri: intermedio,
avanzato. Libro dello studente con esercizi. Roma: Bonacci.
Marin. T. (2008). Nuovo progetto italiano 3. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà italiana: livello intermedioavanzato (B2-C1). Libro dello studente. Roma: Edilingua.
Marin, T. e Magnelli, S. (2007). Nuovo progetto italiano 2. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà italiana:
livello intermedio (B1-B2). Quaderno degli esercizi. Roma: Edilingua.
Marin, T. e Magnelli, S. (2008a). Nuovo progetto italiano 1. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà italiana:
livello elementare (A1-A2). Quaderno degli esercizi. Roma: Edilingua.
Marin, T. e Magnelli, S. (2008b). Nuovo progetto italiano 2. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà italiana:
livello intermedio (B1-B2). Libro dello studente. Roma: Edilingua.
Marin, T. e Magnelli, S. (2009). Nuovo progetto italiano 1. Corso multimediale di lingua e civiltà italiana:
livello elementare (A1-A2). Libro dello studente. Roma: Edilingua.
Mazzetti, A., Falcinelli, M. e Servadio, B. (2002). Qui Italia. Corso elementare di lingua italiana per stranieri.
Quaderno di esercitazioni. Firenze: Le Monnier.
Mazzetti, A., Falcinelli, M. e Servadio, B. (2003). Qui Italia. Corso elementare di lingua italiana per stranieri.
Lingua e grammatica. Firenze: Le Monnier.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2000a). Rete 1. Libro di classe. Perugia: Guerra.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2000b). Rete 1. Libro di casa. Perugia: Guerra.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2001a). Rete 2. Libro di classe. Perugia: Guerra.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2001b). Rete 2. Libro di casa. Perugia: Guerra.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2002a). Rete 3. Libro di classe. Perugia: Guerra.
Mezzadri, M. e Balboni, P. E. (2002b). Rete 3. Libro di casa. Perugia: Guerra.
StojkoviĤ, J. i Zavińin, K. (2010). Amici 4. Italijanski jezik za osmi razred osnovne škole. Beograd: Zavod za
udņbenike.
Ziglio, L. e Rizzo, G. (2001). Espresso 1. Corso di italiano: libro dello studente ed esercizi. Firenze: Alma.

382

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21989">
                <text>57</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21990">
                <text>A contrastive analysis approach to the teaching of auxiliary selection in L2  Italian</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21991">
                <text>Radojević, Dragana</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21992">
                <text>Auxiliary selection (AS) with those Italian intransitive verbs (IVs) that can use both  essere ‗to be‘ and avere ‗to have‘, but with a change in meaning (e.g. È/Ha corso al parco ‗He  ran to/at the park‘), represents one of the major challenges in the acquisition of Italian as L2. In  this paper we argue that this is so largely because this phenomenon has not been treated  adequately in relevant grammars, dictionaries and textbooks. In order to prove our argument we  present a case study of AS with the IV correre ‗to run‘ involving university students of L2  Italian who are native speakers of Serbian. The results indicate that a contrastive analysis  approach to the teaching of AS with IVs is more efficient than the traditional one, and it is  suggested that it should be used more frequently in order to facilitate the acquisition of AS by  learners of L2 Italian.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21993">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21994">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2830" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3601">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/2a2f01de7dc8b0e1ef82f4163fc38344.pdf</src>
        <authentication>f0582692656eee6ad3f3b13e690b3ae8</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21988">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

On Extinct Suffixes: -arium
GEORGETA RAŢĂ
BUASVM, TimiĢoara, România
georgeta_rata@yahoo.com
Abstract: There are two English nominal suffixes sharing the same meaning ―a place
or device containing or associated with [something]‖: -arium and -ary (for the latter,
the English language dictionaries mention only the meaning ―one that relates to or is
connected with [something]‖). These two suffixes have produced, directly or
indirectly, a considerable number of derivatives designating more or less ‗a place‘
(35), ‗a device‘ (33), or other realities (15). Diachronically, the suffix -arium
produced most indirect derivatives in the 13 th c. and almost stopped producing any in
the 20th c., the suffix -ary reached a peak in the 16th c. and stopped producing any in
the 20th c., while Latin nouns in -arium were borrowed in considerable amounts in the
19th c. and almost stopped being borrowed in the 20 th c. The suffix -arium can,
therefore, be considered extinct from the point of view of its productivity. For
students in nature-related fields almost all the nouns in -arium and -ary are indicative
of places and devices of interest for these fields.
Keywords: Nominal suffix, derivation, derivative

INTRODUCTION
The suffix -arium (&lt; L neuter of -ārius ‗-ary‘) is a noun suffix indicating ―a place or device containing
or associated with‖ [AHDEL].
The suffix -ary is both a nominal suffix meaning ‗one that relates to or is connected with‘ and an
adjectival suffix meaning ‗of or relating to‘ [Middle English -arie, from Old French, from Latin -ārius, adj. and
n. suff.] [AHDEL] According to etymological dictionaries, the suffix -ary (in most cases &lt; L -ārius, -ārium
‗connected with, pertaining to, the man engaged in‘) appears in words borrowed from Latin in Middle English.
In later borrowings from Latin to French, it became -aire and passed into ME as -arie, subsequently -ary [OED].

2. MATERIALS AND METHODS
The corpus of derivatives in both -arium and -ary was made up using English language dictionaries and
literature, as shown in References.
Then, the derivatives were grouped as nouns in -arium and nouns in -ary derived directly and indirectly
from Latin words in -arium and in each of the two groups we identified the nouns designating places, devices,
and other cases.
We have also compared chronologically the production of derivatives in -arium and -ary and analysed
the productivity of the nouns in -arium and -ary to show how well these derivatives have turned Romanian
nouns.

3. RESULTS
3.1. NOUNS IN -ARIUM
There are 17 nouns in -arium in our inventory designating either a place or a device containing or
associated with something:
- place (14): aquarium ‗a place for the public exhibition of live aquatic animals and plants‘ [L
aquārium ‗source of water‘ &lt; neuter of aquārius ‗of water‘ &lt; aqua ‗water‘] (1840-1850), cinerarium ‗a place for
keeping the ashes of a cremated body‘ [L cinerārium &lt; neuter of cinerārius ‗of ashes‘ &lt; cinis, ciner- ‗ashes‘]
(1875-1880), columbarium ‗a vault with niches for urns containing ashes of the dead, one of the niches in such a
vault; a dovecote, a pigeonhole in a dovecote‘ [L columbārium ‗sepulchre for urns, dovecote‘ &lt;

columba ‗dove‘] (1840-1850), fumatorium ‗an airtight fumigation chamber in which
chemical vapors are used to destroy insects and fungi on plants‘ [NL &lt; L fūmāre ‗to smoke‘ &lt; fūmus
‗smoke‘], herbarium ‗a place or an institution where a collection of dried plants mounted, labeled, and
systematically arranged for use in scientific study is kept‘ [LL herbārium &lt; L herbārius ‗one skilled in herbs‘ &lt;

496

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
L herba ‗herb, vegetation‘] (1770-1780), leprosarium ‗a hospital for the treatment of leprosy‘ [ML leprosārium
&lt; LL leprosus ‗leprous‘] (1840-1850), oceanarium ‗a large aquarium for the study or display of marine life‘
[OCEAN + -ARIUM, modeled on aquarium] (1935-1940), planetarium ‗a building or room containing a
planetarium, with seats for an audience‘ [NL &lt; neuter of L planētārius] (1765-1775), sacrarium ‗the sanctuary
or sacristy of a church; piscina‘ [ML sacrārium &lt; L shrine &lt; sacer, sacr- ‗sacred‘] (1700-1710), sanitarium ‗a
resort for improvement or maintenance of health, especially for convalescents‘ [NL &lt; L sānitās ‗health‘] (18501855), solarium ‗a room, gallery, or glassed-in porch exposed to the sun‘ [L solārium ‗terrace, flat housetop‘ &lt;
sol ‗sun‘] (1815-1825), termitarium ‗a nest built by a colony of termites; termitary‘ [NL termit (ēs), pl. Of

termes TERMITE + -ARIUM] (1860-1865), terrarium ‗a small enclosure or closed container in which selected
living plants and sometimes small land animals, such as turtles and lizards, are kept and observed‘ [NL &lt; L terra
‗earth‘; TERRENE + -ARIUM] (1885-1890), and vivarium ‗a place, especially an indoor enclosure, for keeping
and raising living animals and plants under natural conditions for observation or research‘ [L vīvārium &lt; neuter
of vīvārius ‗of living creatures‘ &lt; vīvus ‗alive‘] (1590-1600).
- device (4): aquarium ‗a tank, bowl, or other water-filled enclosure in which living fish or other
aquatic animals and plants are kept‘ [L aquārium ‗source of water‘ &lt; neuter of aquārius ‗of water‘ &lt; aqua
‗water‘] (1840-1850), planetarium ‗an apparatus or a model representing the solar system; an optical device for
projecting images of celestial bodies and other astronomical phenomena onto the inner surface of a
hemispherical dome‘ [NL &lt; neuter of L planētārius] (1765-1775), solarium ‗a room, gallery, or glassed-in
porch exposed to the sun‘ [L solārium ‗terrace, flat housetop‘ &lt; sol ‗sun‘] (1815-1825), and termitarium ‗a nest
built by a colony of termites; termitary‘ [NL termit (ēs), pl. Of termes TERMITE + -ARIUM] (1860-1865).
- other meanings (3): honorarium ‗a payment given to a professional person for services for which fees
are not legally or traditionally required‘ [L honorārium &lt; neuter of honorārius ‗honorary‘ &lt; honor, honor‗honor‘] (1650-1660), polyzoarium ‗a bryozoan colony or its supporting skeletal structure‘ [NL Polyzoa phylum
name; POLYZOAN + -ARIUM] (1875-1880), and septarium ‗an irregular polygonal system of calcite-filled
cracks occurring in certain rock concretions‘ [L saeptum ‗partition‘; SEPTUM + -ARIUM] (1775-1785).

3.2. NOUNS IN -ARY
The 30 nouns in -ary in our corpus also designate a place or a device containing or associated with
something:
- place (12): apiary ‗a place where bees and beehives are kept, especially a place where bees are raised
for their honey‘ [L apiārium ‗beehive‘ &lt; apis ‗bee‘] (1645-1655), aviary ‗a large enclosure for holding birds in
confinement‘ [L aviārium &lt; avis ‗bird‘] (1570-1580), columbary ‗a vault with niches for urns containing ashes
of the dead, one of the niches in such a vault; a dovecote, a pigeonhole in a dovecote‘ [L columbārium
‗sepulchre for urns, dovecote‘ &lt; Columba ‗dove‘] (1540-1550), estuary ‗the part of the wide lower course of a
river where its current is met by the tides; an arm of the sea that extends inland to meet the mouth of a river‘ [L
aestuārium &lt; aestus ‗tide, surge, heat‘] (1530-1540), formicary ‗a nest of ants, an anthill‘ [ML formīcārium &lt; L
formīca ‗ant‘] (1810-1820), granary ‗a building for storing threshed grain; a region yielding much grain‘ [L
grānārium &lt; grānum ‗grain‘] (1560-1570), itinerary ‗a route or proposed route of a journey‘ [ME itinerarie &lt;
LL itinerārium ‗account of a journey‘ &lt; neuter of itinerārius ‗of traveling‘ &lt; L iter, itiner- ‗journey‘] (14251475), library ‗a place in which literary and artistic materials, such as books, periodicals, newspapers,
pamphlets, prints, records, and tapes, are kept for reading, reference, or lending, a room in a private home for a
collection of literary and artistic materials, such as books, periodicals, newspapers, pamphlets, prints, records,
and tapes, are kept for reading, reference, or lending, an institution or a foundation maintaining such a collection;
a commercial establishment that lends books for a fee;‘ [ME librarie &lt; AN &lt; L librārium ‗bookcase‘ &lt; neuter of
librārius ‗of books‘ &lt; liber, libr ‗book‘] (1300-1350), piscary ‗a fishery‘ [ML piscārium &lt; L piscis ‗fish‘ + L ārium ‗-arium‘] (1425-1475), sanctuary ‗a sacred place, such as a church, temple, or mosque; the holiest part of
a sacred place, as the part of a Christian church around the altar; a sacred place, such as a church, in which
fugitives formerly were immune to arrest; a place of refuge or asylum; a reserved area in which birds and other
animals, especially wild animals, are protected from hunting or molestation‘ [ME &lt; OF sainctuarie &lt; LL
sānctuārium &lt; L sānctus ‗sacred‘] (1300-1350), seminary ‗a school, especially a theological school for the
training of priests, ministers, or rabbis, a school of higher education, especially a private school for girls; a place
or environment in which something is developed or nurtured‘ [ME seed plot &lt; L sēminārium &lt; sēminārius ‗of
seed‘ &lt; sēmen, sēmin ‗seed‘] (1400-1450), and vestiary ‗a dressing room, cloakroom, or vestry‘ [L vestiārius &lt;
vestis ‗garment‘; ME vestiarie &lt; OF &lt; ML vestiārium &lt; L wardrobe &lt; neuter of vestiārius ‗of clothes‘] (16151625).

497

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
- device (19): bestiary ‗a medieval collection of stories providing physical and allegorical descriptions
of real or imaginary animals along with an interpretation of the moral significance each animal was thought to
embody; a modern version of such a collection‘ [ML bēstiārium &lt; L bēstia ‗beast‘] (1615-1625), breviary
‗Ecclesiastical.a book containing the hymns, offices, and prayers for the canonical hours‘ [ME breviarie &lt; OF
breviaire &lt; ML breviārium &lt; L ‗summary‘ &lt; brevis ‗short‘] (1540-1550), c(h)artulary ‗a collection of deeds or
charters, especially a register of titles to all the property of an estate or a monastery‘ [ME cartularie ‗collection
of documents‘ &lt; ML cartulārium &lt; L cartula, chartula ‗document‘] (1565-1575), corollary ‗a proposition that
follows with little or no proof required from one already proven; a deduction or an inference; a natural
consequence or effect, a result‘ [ME corolarie &lt; L corollārium ‗money paid for a garland, gratuity‘ &lt; corolla
‗small garland‘] (1325-1375), diary ‗a daily record, especially a personal record of events, experiences, and
observations, a journal; a book for use in keeping a personal record, as of experiences‘ [L diārium ‗daily
allowance, daily journal‘ &lt; diēs ‗day‘] (1575-1585), dictionary ‗a reference book containing an alphabetical list
of words, with information given for each word, usually including meaning, pronunciation, and etymology; a
book listing the words of a language with translations into another language; a book listing words or other
linguistic items in a particular category or subject with specialized information about them; Computer Science a
list of words stored in machine-readable form for reference as by spelling-checking software; an electronic
spelling checker‘ [ML dictionārium &lt; L dictio, diction- ‗diction‘] (1520-1530), glossary ‗a list of difficult or
specialized words with their definitions, often placed at the back of a book‘ [ME glosarie &lt; L glossārium &lt;
glossa ‗foreign word‘] (1350-1400), itinerary ‗an account or a record of a journey; a guidebook for travelers‘
[ME itinerarie &lt; LL itinerārium ‗account of a journey‘ &lt; neuter of itinerārius ‗of traveling‘ &lt; L iter, itiner‗journey‘] (1425-1475), lectionary ‗a book or list of lections to be read at church services during the year‘ [ML
lēctionārium &lt; L lēctio, lēction- ‗a reading‘] (1770-1780), library ‗a collection of literary and artistic materials,
such as books, periodicals, newspapers, pamphlets, prints, records, and tapes, are kept for reading, reference, or
lending, especially when systematically arranged; a series or set of books issued by a publisher; a collection of
recorded data or tapes arranged for ease of use; Computer Science. a collection of standard programs, routines,
or subroutines, often related to a specific application, that are available for general use‘ [ME librarie &lt; AN &lt; L
librārium ‗bookcase‘ &lt; neuter of librārius ‗of books‘ &lt; liber, libr ‗book‘] (1300-1350), nectary ‗a glandlike
organ, located outside or within a flower, that secretes nectar‘ [NL nectārium &lt; NECTAR] (1590-1600), ossuary
‗a container or receptacle, such as an urn or a vault, for holding the bones of the dead‘ [LL ossuārium &lt; neuter of
L ossuārius ‗of bones‘ &lt; os, oss-‗bone‘] (1650-1660), ovary ‗the usually paired female or hermaphroditic
reproductive organ that produces ova and, in vertebrates, estrogen and progesterone; Botany. the ovule-bearing
lower part of a pistil that ripens into a fruit‘ [NL ovārium &lt; L ovum ‗egg‘] (1650-1660), pessary ‗any of various
devices worn in the vagina to support or correct the position of the uterus or rectum; a contraceptive diaphragm;
a medicated vaginal suppository‘ [ME pessarie &lt; LL pessārium &lt; pessus, pessum &lt; Gk pesos ‗oval-shaped
stone, pessary‘] (1350-1400), rosary ‗Roman Catholic Church. a form of devotion to the Virgin Mary, chiefly
consisting of three sets of five decades each of the Hail Mary, each decade preceded by the Lord‘s Prayer and
ending with a doxology; one of these sets of decades; a string of beads of 5 or 15 decades on which these prayers
are counted; similar beads used by other religious groups‘ [ME rose garden &lt; ML rosārium ‗rose garden, rosary‘
&lt; L rose garden &lt; neuter of rosārius ‗of roses‘ &lt; rosa ‗rose‘] (1400-1450), sanctuary ‗immunity to arrest
afforded by a sanctuary‘ [ME &lt; OF sainctuarie &lt; LL sānctuārium &lt; L sānctus ‗sacred‘] (1300-1350), spermary
‗an organ or a gland in which male gametes are formed, especially in invertebrate animals‘ [NL spermārium &lt;
LL sperma, semen] (1860-1865), syllabary ‗a list of syllables; a list or set of written characters for a language,
each character representing a syllable‘ [NL syllabārium &lt; L syllaba ‗syllable‘] (1580-1590), and vocabulary ‗all
the words of a language; the sum of words used by, understood by, or at the command of a particular person or
group; a list of words and often phrases, usually arranged alphabetically and defined or translated, a lexicon or
glossary; a supply of expressive means, a repertoire of communication‘ [F vocabulaire &lt; OF &lt; ML
vocābulārium &lt; neuter of vocābulārius ‗of words‘ &lt; L vocābulum ‗name‘] (1525-1535).
- other meanings (2): electuary ‗a drug mixed with sugar and water or honey into a pasty mass suitable
for oral administration‘ [ME electuarie &lt; LL ēlēctuārium probably alteration of Gk ekleikton &lt; ekleikhein ‗to
lick up‘] (1350-1400) and salary ‗fixed compensation for services, paid to a person on a regular basis‘ [ME
salarie &lt; AN &lt; L salārium ‗money given to Roman soldiers to buy salt‘ &lt; neuter of salārius ‗pertaining to salt‘
&lt; sāl ‗salt‘] (1350-1400).

3.3. OTHER CASES
The 28 nouns ending in other suffixes but -arium or -ary but that originate in the L -arium also
designate ‗a place‘ or ‗a device containing or associated with something‘:
- place (9): ambry ‗Chiefly British. a pantry; a niche near the altar of a church for keeping sacred
vessels and vestments‘ [ME almerie ‗place for safekeeping‘ &lt; OF almarie &lt; ML almārium &lt; L armārium
‗closet‘ &lt; arma ‗tools‘] (1200-1250), armoire ‗a large, often ornate cabinet or wardrobe‘ [F armoire &lt; OF

498

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
armoire &lt; L armārium ‗chest‘ &lt; arma ‗tools‘] (1565-1575), cellar ‗a room or enclosed space used for storage,
usually beneath the ground or under a building; a basement; an underground shelter, as from storms; a wine
cellar‘ [ME celer &lt; OF &lt; LL cellārium ‗pantry‘ &lt; L cella ‗storeroom‘] (1175-1225), foyer ‗a lobby or an
anteroom, as of a theater or hotel; an entrance hall, a vestibule‘ [F social center &lt; OF foier ‗fireplace‘ &lt; VL
*focārium &lt; LL neuter of focārius ‗of the hearth‘ (unattested sense) &lt; L focus ‗fire‘] (1855-1860), fumarole ‗a
hole in a volcanic area from which hot smoke and gases escape‘ [It fumarola &lt; LL fūmāriolum ‗smoke hole‘
diminutive of L fūmārium ‗smoke chamber‘ &lt; fūmus ‗smoke‘] (1805-1815), fumatory ‗an airtight fumigation
chamber in which chemical vapors are used to destroy insects and fungi on plants. [&lt; L fūmāre ‗to smoke‘ &lt;
fūmus ‗smoke‘], garner ‗a granary‘ [ME &lt; garner, garner ‗granary‘ &lt; OF gernier, grenier &lt; L grānārium]
(1125-1275), larder ‗a place, such as a pantry or cellar, where food is stored; a supply of food‘ [ME &lt; AN &lt; ML
lārdārium &lt; L lārdum ‗bacon‘] (1275-1325), and rathskeller ‗a restaurant or tavern, usually below street level,
that features the serving of beer‘ [ObsG restaurant in the city hall basement: German Rat ‗council, counsel‘ (&lt;
MHG rāt &lt; OHG + G Keller ‗cellar‘ &lt; MHG &lt; OHG kellāri &lt; L cellārium)] (1860-1865).
- device (10): beaker ‗a wide cylindrical glass vessel with a pouring lip, used as a laboratory container
and mixing jar; a large drinking cup with a wide mouth‘ [MD bīker ‗drinking vessel‘ and ME bekir &lt; ML
bicārius, bicārium probably &lt; Gk bikos ‗jug‘ possibly of Egyptian origin] (1300-1350), calendar ‗any of various
systems of reckoning time in which the beginning, length, and divisions of a year are defined; a table showing
the months, weeks, and days in at least one specific year; a schedule of events; an ordered list of matters to be
considered: a calendar of court cases; the bills on a legislative calendar; Chiefly British. a catalogue of a
university‘ [ME calendar &lt; OF calendier &lt; LL kalendārium &lt; L account book &lt; kalendae ‗calends‘ (from the
fact that monthly interest was due on the calends)] (1175-1225), chandelier ‗a branched, decorative lighting
fixture that holds a number of bulbs or candles and is suspended from a ceiling‘ [ME chandeler &lt; OF chandelier
&lt; VL *candēlārium alteration of L candēlābrum ‗candelabrum‘] (1655-1665), inventory ‗a detailed, itemized
list, report, or record of things in one‘s possession, especially a periodic survey of all goods and materials in
stock; the process of making such a list, report, or record; the items listed in such a report or record, the quantity
of goods and materials on hand, stock; an evaluation or a survey, as of abilities, assets, or resources‘ [ME
inventorie &lt; ML inventorium alteration of LL inventārium &lt; L inventus past participle of invenīre ‗to find‘]
(1375-1425), mortar ‗a vessel in which substances are crushed or ground with a pestle; a machine in which
materials are ground and blended or crushed; a portable, muzzleloading cannon used to fire shells at low
velocities, short ranges, and high trajectories; any of several similar devices, such as one that shoots life lines
across a stretch of water; any of various bonding materials used in masonry, surfacing, and plastering, especially
a plastic mixture of cement or lime, sand, and water that hardens in place and is used to bind together bricks or
stones‘ [ME mortar &lt; OE mortere &lt; OF mortier &lt; L mortārium] (before 1000), pannier ‗a large wicker basket; a
basket or pack, usually one of a pair, that fastens to the rack of a bicycle and hangs over the side of one of the
wheels; a framework of wire, bone, or other material formerly used to expand a woman‘s skirt at the hips; a skirt
or an overskirt puffed out at the hips‘ [ME panier &lt; OF &lt; L pānārium ‗breadbasket‘ &lt; pānis ‗bread‘] (12501300), pitcher ‗a container for liquids, usually having a handle and a lip or spout for pouring; Botany. a
pitcherlike part, such as the leaf of a pitcher plant‘ [ME picher &lt; OF pichier alteration of bichier &lt; ML bicārium
‗drinking cup‘ probably &lt; Gk bikos ‗jar‘ possibly &lt; Egyptian biķ ‗oil vessel‘] (1250-1300), primer ‗an
elementary textbook for teaching children to read; a book that covers the basic elements of a subject‘ [ME &lt; NF
&lt; ML prīmārium &lt; neuter of prīmārius ‗first‘ &lt; L &lt; prīmus] (1350-1400), sampler ‗one who is employed to take
and appraise samples, as of a food product; a mechanical device that is used to obtain and analyze samples; a
decorative piece of cloth embroidered with various designs or mottoes in a variety of stitches, serving as an
example of skill at needlework; a representative collection or selection; a variety, an assortment‘ [Partly ME
model &lt; AN *essamplur and partly short for ME ensampler &lt; AN ensamplour &lt; LL exemplārium ‗model, copy‘
&lt; L copy] (1250-1300), and tiller ‗Nautical. a lever used to turn a rudder and steer a boat‘ [ME tiler ‗stock of a
crossbow‘ &lt; OF telier &lt; ML tēlārium ‗weaver‘s beam‘ &lt; L tēla] (1375-1425)
- other cases (10): abecedarian ‗one who teaches or studies the alphabet; one who is just learning; a
beginner‘ [ME &lt; ML abecedārium ‗alphabet‘ &lt; LL abecedārius ‗alphabetical‘ &lt; A B C D + -ārius ‗-ary‘] (15951605), calamari ‗squid prepared as food‘ [It pl. of calamaro &lt; LL calamārium ‗pen-case‘ &lt; L calamārius
relating to a reed pen &lt; calamus ‗reed pen‘ (perhaps &lt; the ―ink‖ the squid secretes)] (1560s), cellar ‗Slang. the
lowest level, especially in the standing of an athletic team‘ [ME celer &lt; OF &lt; LL cellārium ‗pantry‘ &lt; L cella
‗storeroom‘] (1175-1225), danger ‗exposure or vulnerability to harm or risk; a source or an instance of risk or
peril; Obsolete. power, especially power to harm‘ [ME daunger ‗power, dominion, peril‘ &lt; OF dangier &lt; VL
*dominiārium ‗authority, power‘ &lt; L dominium ‗sovereignty‘ &lt; dominus ‗lord, master‘] (1175-1225), dower ‗the
part or interest of a deceased man‘s real estate allotted by law to his widow for her lifetime; money or property
brought by a bride to her husband at marriage; a natural endowment or gift; a dowry‘ [ME douere &lt; OF douaire
&lt; ML dotārium &lt; L dos, dot- ‗dowry‘] (1250-1300), dowry ‗money or property brought by a bride to her
husband at marriage; a sum of money required of a postulant at a convent; a natural endowment or gift, a talent;
Archaic. the part or interest of a deceased man‘s real estate allotted by law to his widow for her lifetime‘ [ME

499

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
douerie &lt; AN douarie &lt; ML dotārium, doārium, doāria ‗dower‘] (1250-1300), exemplar ‗one that is worthy of
imitation; a model; one that is typical or representative, an example; an ideal that serves as a pattern, an
archetype; a copy, as of a book‘ [ME exemplere &lt; LL exemplārium &lt; L exemplum ‗example‘] (1350-1400),
lekvar ‗a sweet spread or pastry filling made of prunes or apricots‘ [Hung lekvár ‗jam‘ &lt; Slovak &lt; Czech lektvar
‗electuary‘ &lt; MHG lactuārje, latuērge &lt; OF leituaire &lt; LL ēlēctuārium ‗electuary‘] (1955-1960), quintal ‗a unit
of mass in the metric system equal to 100 kilograms‘ [ME a unit of weight &lt; OF &lt; ML quintāle &lt; Arabic qinţār
&lt; LGk kentēnarion &lt; LL centēnārium (pondus) ‗hundred(weight)‘ &lt; L centēnārius ‗of a hundred‘] (1425-1275),
and seminar ‗a small group of advanced students in a college or graduate school engaged in original research or
intensive study under the guidance of a professor who meets regularly with them to discuss their reports and
findings; a course of study so pursued; a scheduled meeting of such a group; a meeting for an exchange of ideas,
a conference‘ [G &lt; L sēminārium ‗seed plot‘] (1885-1890).

4. DISCUSSION
From a chronological point of view, the nouns in our inventory share the periods underlined in Figure 1.

12
10
8
-arium
6

-ary
other

4
2
0
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11

Figure 1. Chronological distribution of nouns in -arium, -ary or other endings inherited or borrowed from Latin
or other languages: 1: before 1000; 2: 1000-1099; 3: 1100-1199; 4: 1200-1299; 5: 1300-1399; 6: 1400-1499; 7
:1500-1599; 8: 1600-1699; 9: 1700-1799; 10: 1800-1899; 11: 1900-1999.
Nouns in -arium have preserved their Latin plural and the most frequently used have also developed
English plurals in -s (Table 1):
Table 1. Plural forms of nouns in -arium

Noun in -arium
aquarium
cinerarium
columbarium
fumatorium
herbarium
honorarium

Plural form
Latin plural
Aquaria
Cineraria
columbaria
Fumatoria
Herbaria
Honoraria

English plural
aquariums
fumatoriums
herbariums
honorariums
500

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
leprosarium
oceanarium
planetarium
polyzoarium
sacrarium
sanitarium
septarium
solarium
termitarium
terrarium
vivarium

Leprosaria
Oceanaria
Planetaria
Polyzoaria
Sacraria
Sanitaria
Septaria
Solaria
Termitaria
Terraria
Vivaria

leprosariums
oceanariums
planetariums
sanitariums
solariums
terrariums
vivariums

In their turn, English nouns originating in Latin nouns in -arium but that do not preserve any
resemblance with the latter, have produced derivatives – mainly adjectival and verbal ones (Table 2).
Table 2. Derivatives of English nouns originating in Latin nouns in -arium

Noun
abecedarian
calendar
cellar
corollary
dower
estuary
glossary
inventory
itinerary
mortar
nectary
pannier
septarium
vestiary

Noun
Glossarist
-

Adjective
abecedarian
corollary
estuarial
glossarial
itinerary
nectarial
panniered
septarian
vestiary

Verb
calendar
cellar
dower
inventory
mortar
-

5. CONCLUSIONS
…
REFERENCES
Online Etymology Dictionary. Online: http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?l=e. (OED)
Soukhanov, A. H. (2008). The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. (AHDEL)

501

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21982">
                <text>75</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21983">
                <text>On Extinct Suffixes: -arium</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21984">
                <text>RATA, GEORGETA</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21985">
                <text>There are two English nominal suffixes sharing the same meaning ―a place  or device containing or associated with [something]‖: -arium and -ary (for the latter,  the English language dictionaries mention only the meaning ―one that relates to or is  connected with [something]‖). These two suffixes have produced, directly or  indirectly, a considerable number of derivatives designating more or less ‗a place‘  (35), ‗a device‘ (33), or other realities (15). Diachronically, the suffix -arium  produced most indirect derivatives in the 13th c. and almost stopped producing any in  the 20th c., the suffix -ary reached a peak in the 16th c. and stopped producing any in  the 20th c., while Latin nouns in -arium were borrowed in considerable amounts in the  19th c. and almost stopped being borrowed in the 20th c. The suffix -arium can,  therefore, be considered extinct from the point of view of its productivity. For  students in nature-related fields almost all the nouns in -arium and -ary are indicative  of places and devices of interest for these fields.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21986">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21987">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2829" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3600">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/35a9370944fa5d1f59a5919d765ead9c.pdf</src>
        <authentication>e89e14d72505142714683886fdfdac39</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21981">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

One Example of Balkanistic Discourse on Montenegro
Olivera PopoviĤ
Department of Italian language and Literature
Univerzitet Crne Gore, Montenegro
oljapop@yahoo.it
Cvijeta BrajiĦiĤ
Department of Italian language and Literature
Univerzitet Crne Gore, Montenegro
cvijeta82@yahoo.com
Abstract: The aim of this study is to analyze the presence of balkanistic
discourse in the article "Montenegro, land of stout hearts and stones",
published in the Washington Post on December 3, 2010, and to indicate
the factors involved in its generation and reproduction. We will pursue the
specifics of the author's perception of the Montenegrin geographical and
civilizational space and examine his writings in their relation to prior
paradigms of travel narrative regarding Montenegro and other Balkan
countries.
Key Words: balkanistic discourse, travel account, Montenegro

Introduction
In recent years, travel literature has been increasingly studied, not only its literary but also the
cultural and historical aspects. Due to the abundance of themes and to the variety of the information
offered, travel books are particularly suitable for the analysis of traditional views of a country and for
the identification of stereotypes and connotations that were tied to it. In fact, we do not consider travel
accounts only as a personal testimony about the encounter with the Other or as a transfer of
impressions and observations of phenomena in a given historical moment, but also as the construction
of images of the Other and selective transfer of observations, opinions and facts through their
generalization. Many critics have pointed out that travel narrative was the "birthplace" of many
stereotypes concerning one nation that were built in a specific historical time to be later accepted as a
generalization of the essential and timeless qualities of the people. As Sarup (1993) underlines in his
Postructuralism ―every narrative simultaneously presents and represents a world, that is, simultaneously
creates and makes up a reality and asserts that it stands independent of that same reality. In other words,
narrative seems at once to reveal or illuminate a world and to hide and distort it.‖
Edward Said with his study Orientalism (New York, 1978) enhanced the research in the field
of a priori schemes of perception and representation of otherness or strangeness that are imposed by a
particular discourse in a particular context. The recent events of the war in the Balkans and the renewed
interest of politicians, historians, writers and publicists in the South Eastern Europe have led to a
flourishing production of various articles on the Balkan countries, offering rich material for analysis of
that kind of narrative in comparison with the writings of previous epochs. Basing their research upon
Said's works many critics have dealt with issues such as essentialization of cultural differences in a
particular historical moment and their politicization and instrumentalization in subsequent historical
contexts. Bulgarian historian Maria Todorova, dealing with the reception of the Balkans in the
scientific and political circles in Europe and the United States, also approaches this issue from the
aspect of discourse. In her book Imagining the Balkans (New York, 1997) she argued "that a specific
discourse, balkanism, molds attitudes and actions toward the Balkans and could be treated as the most
persistent form or ‗mental map‘ in which information about the Balkans is placed, most notably in
journalistic, political, and literary output." As opposed to "Orientalism" which she characterizes as a
"discourse about an imputed opposition" she defines Balkanism as "discourse about an imputed
ambiguity ", believing that the Balkans were seen as the alter ego of Europe and its uncivilized
element, designed as "an incomplete self". The Balkans is therefore treated as an area inextricably
bound up with a special identity that pre-determines the character of its inhabitants, making them
substantially different from the inhabitants of the surrounding countries.

1011

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Findings and Discussion
The article "Montenegro, land of stout hearts and stones" written by Robert Rigney, published in the
Washington Post 3/12/2010 provides numerous examples of some basic features of balkanistic
discourse. This contribution can be characterized as travel reportage, although the description of the
route is given only partially. The writer presented details of his travel through Montenegro and means
of transport used, but did not mention where and how he came to the Balkans, nor gave any
information on the return. Since he came to Montenegro by train from Serbia, we can assume that this
visit is just one of the stages of his journey through the Balkans.
The very title of this article, linking the words heart and stone, implies the image of the
Montenegrins that Rigney wants to develop. The title also suggests that Rigney intends to use
exotization and generalization in his reportage on Montenegro. This is reflected by his decision to use
keywords such as "land of" followed by the conclusions applicable to all members of the country.
Thus, "land of giants" means a country where there are no people of medium height or dwarves, a "land
of stout hearts" attributed as trait to all its inhabitants, indicates the basic characteristics of this nation,
by which it is substantially different from all the neighbors. Exotization of Montenegro is present from
the very beginning of Rigney's stay in this country. The impression of "dramatic" train ride from
Prijepolje to Podgorica while crossing a number of tunnels, over deep ravines and ―indescribably rocky
mountains‖ is reinforced by his statement that people can not be seen in these areas because of the too
inhospitable environment, ignoring the fact that those areas are inhabited by tens of thousands of
people. This view corresponds to the perception of the Balkans present in the travel literature of
nineteenth century where the Balkan countries are presented to readers as "Europe's Indian territory."
(Todorova, 1997)
Rigney made no attempt to conceal his perception of Montenegrin society as criminal and
corrupted. After his arrival to Podgorica, the author compares the actual situation with the condition in
the nineties, without revealing to the readers if he visited Podgorica in that period and if he had the
opportunity to personally verify the assertion that the city was "rife with Mafiosi". Instead, without any
inquiry into social conditions, Rigney affirms that "illicit atmosphere of those times still clings to the
city" and compares the Montenegrin capital, where he spent a few hours around the train station, with
the wild west.
Other sites that Rigney managed to visit in Montenegro are the Ostrog Monastery, Cetinje,
Herceg Novi and Budva. The first two places have great historical, cultural and spiritual significance
for the people of Montenegro, while the other two are tourist centers. As the author himself claims, one
of the reasons that encouraged him to visit Montenegro is its multi-ethnicity. Therefore, immediately
after his arrival to Podgorica Rigney decides to visit the monastery of Ostrog, considered as a holy site
by adherents of different religions. However, instead of believers that usually visit Ostrog, Rigney
notes "all manner of religious kitsch", referring to the souvenirs, that are sold in front of many churches
and monasteries in the world, and "a couple of cafes blaring the usual Serbian and Montenegrin
national music, with waitresses wearing T-shirts emblazoned with the visages of Radovan Karadzic
and other indicted war criminals." Rigney's opinion about the music that emerged in the '90 called
turbo-folk, which, albeit very popular, can not be characterized as national since the state television
channels and many radio stations do not broadcast it, is well known from his earlier writings on music
in the Balkans. He undertakes to suggest:
―Turbo folk is a style of music unique to Serbia, but with equivalents in almost every
developing country in the world, that blends elements of folk music with Western pop and is
characteristic of societies in transition. Turbo folk is relentlessly upbeat, oriental, marked by maniacal
keyboards and wailing Turkish style vocals with artists singing by turns of love and nationalism. The
most famous practitioner at the time was Ceca, wife of murdered mafia boss and paramilitary leader
Arkan―.
Turbo-folk music without any doubt deserves a large number of objections, but it can hardly
be proved that the connection of this kind of music and its fans to the nationalism is stronger than the
connection of other kinds of music (pop, rap, rock, heavy metal ...) to the same phenomena. It seems
that Rigney believes that the quality of music is directly related to the development of a country in
which it arises, and that it can be expected that in the richer countries exists only quality music, which
in addition celebrates the noble human feelings, while the poorer ones are dominated by the music
devoid of art and other values. This progressionistic understanding of cultural development was present
in some earlier works of travel writing genre regarding Southeastern Europe, where the Balkans were
presented as an area "subject to the universal laws of evolution but theirs was a backward culture and
civilization" (Todorova, 1997), while the culture in Western countries is assessed as advanced and
superior in every way. Rigney repeats all the negative stereotypes about the Balkans that dominated the
collective imaginaries of Western countries after the disintegration of Yugoslavia and often represents

1012

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
the Balkan countries to his readers as a threat to European culture. Thus, in an article about Trumpet
Festival in Guca, published on 16/09/2008 on a web page, entitled "European Balkan project, a cultural
phenomenon, " Rigney concludes: "This was Serbia, a land of heated passions, and this was Guca,
where nationalist sentiment is mixed with large quantities of alcohol made for a potentially dangerous
mix. " In addition to showing surprise that at big music concerts in Serbia people drink alcohol (as it
was specific only to Serbia and not a widespread phenomenon that characterizes major music events
organized around the world) Rigney is also concerned about nationalism that, in his opinion, is
promoted at these events.
Rigney‘s intention to represent the Ostrog monastery as a gathering place for nationalist
transpires in his description of two waitresses dressed in t-shirts with images of the Hague convicts. We
can not verify the authenticity of this statement, nor claim that in Montenegro there are no people who
support the military leaders concerned, but we were intrigued by other things that Rigney "saw" in
Ostrog. There are, for example, cypress trees and olive groves which certainly do not grow there and
our curiosity was also aroused by his assumption that the area probably was once inhabited by the
"Albanian shepherds with fierce, wolflike dogs trained to fly at strangers‖. The first mention of this
specific type of dogs can be found in the famous publication of Vialla de Sommieres Voyage
Historique et Politique au Montenegro, published in the 1820th in Paris and later translated into
English. This publication has served as a model for many authors who visited Montenegro and wrote
about it.
Rigney seizes the opportunity to present his reflections on nationalism in Montenegro during
his visit to Cetinje (historical capital of Montenegro) and to the mausoleum on the Lovcen mountain
which is the burial place of famous Montenegrin poet and ruler Petar II Petrovic Njegos. Rigney draws
his readers' attention to the signs "perforated by bullets, fired by some drunken Montenegrin in an
excess of glee, " which completes the fictitious image of Montenegro as the wild west. Upon arrival at
the mausoleum he concludes that "The Nazis would have loved this place ". However, this observation
applies not only to the "fascist architecture" but also to the "couple of Montenegrins in nationalist Tshirts" who were selling flags and ―patriotic souvenirs‖. While the sale of souvenirs is considered
lucrative and desirable activity in other states, Rigney seems to think that in Montenegro this points to
nationalism of its people and allows the categorization of souvenirs as patriotic and unpatriotic. In
refering to the salesmen he cannot help noticing: "They would have preferred me to be a Serbian or a
Montenegrin. They had at least hoped I was a Slav. Still, they could not refuse me a ticket. " It remains
unclear to the readers what makes Rigney think that the salesmen are nationalists and racists when he
only purchases the ticket without any discussion with them.
The only dialogue that Rigney noted in his travel reportage is his conversation with the owner
of a bookstore in Herceg-Novi. The conversation topic, the independence of Kosovo from Serbia, was
chosen by the journalist after an unusual encouragement from the bookstore owner to ask him anything
he wanted to know about Serbs and Serbia. This unnatural dialogue is more appropriate in situations
where the speaker can not freely participate in the conversation and direct it to the topic of his interest,
so he needs to find a way to suggest the questions he wants to be asked. After noting that the bookshop
owner opposes the independence of Kosovo, Rigney quotes his words that may help the readers
understand the bases of religiosity of the population in Montenegro: myths and fatalism. When asked if
he is only the seller or the owner of the shop, the bookstore owner replies that everything belongs to
God and explains his belief with a fairy tale about a farmer whose farm had been repeatedly burned
until he realized that he needed to recognize that God owns everything on earth. Rigney's interlocutor
shares his personal experience of surviving the earthquake in Montenegro in 1979, which warned him
that he was nothing more than a "user" of things that belong to God.
Dialogue is not the only form of narration used by Rigney to convey his thoughts on religion
and spirituality in Montenegro. There are also descriptions: abandoned churches in the region of
Budva, "dark Orthodox churches hung with icons and swimming in incense" in Herceg Novi, and we
should not forget the random passerby who offered him a drive from the Ostrog monastery to
Podgorica, in whose car at least four crosses were hanging from the rearview mirror. Rigney
humorously explains their role. In his opinion, their presence "was perhaps an indication of how much
he needed the grace of God to protect him on the road" because he was driving like a lunatic.
We notice that Rigney pays particular attention to the values that he believes do not exist in
Montenegro and that he nurtures an anachronistic and fabulous view on Montenegrins as fearless
warriors. He claims that he decided to visit Montenegro because he was "inspired by the colorful
history of the place, Montenegro's tradition of resistance to the Turks during the nearly 500-year
Ottoman occupation of the Balkans". Therefore he quotes Rebecca West, who visited Montenegro in
the thirties of the twentieth century, and says that the architecture of Cetinje depicts "the austere ways
of the Montenegrins, who distinguished themselves mainly in the field of battle and never had much

1013

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
interest in the finer things of life ". Despite the fact that there is no longer a regular military service in
Montenegro, Rigney is still fascinated by this very romantic mystification of Montenegrins in the spirit
of a much older tradition of travel narratives and continues to exploit "the myth of Balkan rebellion and
heroism" (ĥoloviĤ 2008). This confirms Maria Todorova's conclusion that the Balkans in the west are
still seen as "The Volksmuseum of Europe." Climbing up to the mausoleum on LovĤen Rigney notices
only desert and ruins which leads him to the following reasoning:
―I thought about the heroes who had once populated these valleys. In the words of Burns, it
was once, perhaps a hundred years ago, "the birthplace of valor, the country of worth." The race has
since all but died out. Left home. Moved abroad. The last representatives, big, quiet men, are to be seen
sadly smiling behind the counter of some local restaurant. But up in the mountains, I thought about
their ancestors, the race of mountain men who once nimbly trod these stones, armed to the teeth with
guns and knives, accustomed to sleeping bareheaded in the rain at night in the mountains, ready to fight
the Turks at a moment's notice. The whole landscape was full of the memories of these people; their
ghosts lived in the stones.‖
In his article "Balkanistic discourse and its critics" Ivan Colovic points to the constitutive
ambiguity of exotic discourse because "people and things that it ‘describes‘ do not have two kinds of
characteristics, the bad and good ones, but those are mostly the same characteristics, differently
interpreted. For example, in some circumstances use of force can be praised as a noble courage and
grit, and in some other occasions this can be interpreted as barbarity and bullying." Also, according to
Rigney, working in tourist sector, in other countries considered as one of the most important factors of
development, in Montenegro is an indicator of degradation of social values. In his opinion, in the
process of transformation into civil society Montenegro has lost much of its exoticism and authenticity.
Therefore, disappointed in his expectations to see Montenegrins armed to the teeth, Rigney considers
the warriors and heroes as guardians of real values, while he describes modern Montenegrin society as
decadent and nationalistic.
It is significant that Rigney wishes to present himself as an adventurous traveler, who,
deprived of all conveniences of modern society, has to make his way through the rugged regions, and is
even forced to deal with dangerous situations such as possible traffic accident, assault by wild animals
or armed drunken Montenegrins, exposure to extreme weather conditions and so on. It is interesting,
for example, that in the description of Montenegrin towns he does not mention their architecture which
is a very r ich amalgam of various architectural styles, wherein the influences of various
epochs find due expression. He also avoids to mention any hotel or resort, so the reader might
wonder whether these facilities exist in Montenegro. He even chooses to stay in the old fort that was
transformed into a bunker during the Second World War and to sleep in a tent, so the next day,
"oppressed by the intolerable heat and deadly thirsty" he hardly manages to find a fishing village to
quench hunger and thirst. Our traveler had no luck on this trip because he finds only closed shops,
despite the fact that, due to the tourist orientation of the town, a large number of stores are open on
Sundays in Budva. Also, after visiting the mausoleum on LovĤen, Rigney, exhausted from climbing the
mountain, concludes that there is no question of returning, and is therefore forced to sleep on the
mountain, without even taking into consideration the possibility to use some of very cheap taxi
services. We conclude that the narrativization allows Rigney to create the image of Montenegro as an
exotic area in which extraordinary experiences are expected.
The climate is also one of the factors that contribute to exoticism of this small Balkan country.
Rigney notices it immediately upon his arrival to Podgorica due to sudden changes in temperature and
tropical heat. The experience of extreme climatic conditions is intensified by the description of a night
spent in a tent on LovĤen: "That night, there was a thunderstorm that put the fear of God in me. I had
never in my life heard such thunder. The heavens sounded like they were cracking open, and the
ground shook under me. " In the atmosphere of intimidating nocturne the imagination of our traveler is
captivated by the image of Njegos," who used to climb this mountain during thunderstorms to
commune with the elements." This idea of geo-mystical symbiosis of man and nature, often present in
romantic travel literature of the XIX century, is the only information about the famous Montenegrin
poet and philosopher, died at an early age of 38 of a lung disease, that Rigney has chosen to share with
his readers.
Rigney concludes his article by quoting one Montenegrin who expressed his perception of the
region claiming: "All we have is stones.", which effectively completes the picture of the country and
the people that the American journalist wanted to present.
Maybe it is a coincidence that the article was published in the Washington Post in December
2010, at the time when the EU members had to decide whether to grant Montenegro with

1014

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
the status of a Candidate Country, but one should not lose sight of this fact in the analysis of
Rigney's observations, especially after reading some of his articles about the Balkans published in
online journals. Our search for other motives that have led Rigney to Montenegro and encouraged him
to convey his findings to this reportage is inspired by his failure to accomplish his own goals. Thus,
although he claims to have come to Montenegro to see the mountains and the sea, Rigney did not visit
the north of the country nor mountain resorts which attract many tourists, and despite the assertion that
he does not like crowds and tourists, he chooses to visit Montenegro during summer, in the months
when this country has more tourists than residents, which prevents him from exploring the old town of
Budva or other attractive tourist destinations.

Conclusions and Recommendations
The analysis of Rigney's description of his journey through Montenegro indicates the
interpretative strategies and literary mystification of perception that are used to confirm a priori ideas
about this Balkan country or to transform the desired perception into reality. Namely, it is noticeable
that his experience of Montenegro is influenced by the "horizon of expectation" that he had prior to the
arrival. His perception is based on images of travel writers who visited Montenegro in past decades,
who also wrote their travelogues relaying on pre-existing cultural reference points, as well as on
articles on the Balkans during the war. Nor did the author neglect the expectations of his readers or the
audience for which the article was intended. Years of war and crisis have influenced the perception of
the Balkans in Western countries. This rich depositary of images is dominated by ideological biases
with negative connotations. The persistence of negative stereotypes in the collective imaginaries has
also been influenced by film industry often linking the Balkans with nationalism, crime, violence,
savagery and tyranny. Such fictitious images do not take into account decades of peaceful coexistence
between people of different nationality and religion, but only years saturated with conflict, producing
new images in order to reaffirm already adopted and ossified conventions of representation.

Referrences :
Berber, N. (2010). Unveiling Bosnia-Herzegovina in British Travel Literature (1844-1912), Pisa: PlusPisa university press.
Bracewell, W. (2008). The Limits of Europe in East European Travel Writing, in: Under Eastern Eyes:
A Comparative Introduction to Eas European Travel Writing on Europe, edited by Wendy Bracewell
and Alex Drace – Francis, Budapest – New Yourk: Central European University Press.
Bracewell, W. (2008). Travels through the Slav World, in: Under Eastern Eyes: A Comparative
Introduction to Eas European Travel Writing on Europe, edited by Wendy Bracewell and Alex Drace –
Francis, Budapest – New Yourk: Central European University Press.
ĥoloviĤ, I. (2010). BalkanistiĦki diskurs i njegovi kritiĦari, Republika, glasilo graħanskog
samooslobaħanja, no. 490 – 491, http://www.republika.co.rs/490-491/21.html
ĥoloviĤ, I. (2008). Zašto se dičimo Balkanom, u: Ivan ĥoloviĤ, Balkan – teror kulture, Biblioteka XX
vek.
Goldsworthy, V. (2006). The Balkans in the Nineteenth-Century British Travel Writing, in: Travel
Writing in the Nineteenth-Century: Filling the Blank Spaces, edited by Tim Youngs, London: Anthem
Press.
Hayden – BakiĤ, M., Hayden, R. (1992). Orientalist Variations on the Theme Balkans: Symbolic
Geography in Recent Yugoslav Cultural Politics, Slavic Review, vol. 51, no. 1.
Jezernik, B. (2008). Divlja Evropa, prevela s engleskog S. GlińiĤ, Biblioteka XX vek.

1015

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Pratt, M. L. (1992). Imperial Eyes. Travel Writing and Transculturation, London and New York:
Routledge.
RaspudiĤ, N. (2010). Jadranski (polu)orijentalizam: Prikazi Hrvata u talijanskoj knjiņevnosti, Zagreb:
Naklada JurĦiĤ d.o.o.
Rigney, R. Belgrade not always likes the Electronic Trubaci, Norient: indipendent network for local
and global soundscapes, http://norient.com/stories/shazalakazoo/
Rigney,R.(2010). Neukôlln‘s unwanted Gypsies, Exberliner: Berlin in English since 2002,
http://www.exberliner.com/articles/neukllns-unwanted-gypsies/index.html
Rigney, R. (2008). GuĦa, European Balkan Project: a cultural phenomenon, http://ebp.arthurengelbert.de/?p=41
Said, E. (2008). Orijentalizam, prevela s engleskog Drinka GojkoviĤ, Beograd: Biblioteka XX vek.
Todorova, M. (2006). Imaginarni Balkan, (2. izdanje), prevele s engleskog A. B. VuĦen i D. StarĦeviĤ,
Biblioteka XX vek.
Todorova, M. (1997). Imagining the Balkans, New Yourk: Oxford University Press.
Todorova, M.(2010) Balkanizam kao retorika drugosti, PeńĦanik, prevela sa engleskog Slobodanka
GlińiĤ, http://www.pescanik.net/content/view/5623/1213/
Sarup, M. (1993). An introductory guide to post-structuralism and post-modernism, (second edition),
London: Harvestar Wheatsheaf.

1016

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21975">
                <text>571</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21976">
                <text>One Example of Balkanistic Discourse on Montenegro</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21977">
                <text>Popović, Olivera
Brajičić, Cvijeta</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21978">
                <text>The aim of this study is to analyze the presence of balkanistic  discourse in the article "Montenegro, land of stout hearts and stones",  published in the Washington Post on December 3, 2010, and to indicate  the factors involved in its generation and reproduction. We will pursue the  specifics of the author's perception of the Montenegrin geographical and  civilizational space and examine his writings in their relation to prior  paradigms of travel narrative regarding Montenegro and other Balkan  countries.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21979">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21980">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2828" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3599">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/1cb2439392d814d44577aababf5a21a1.pdf</src>
        <authentication>101caff0b2f324fbbfc74b6c8992ea42</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21974">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Linguistic competence vs. Translation competence: A pedagogic
approach
Teodora Popescu
―1 Decembrie 1918‖ University of Alba Iulia
Romania
teo_popescu@hotmail.com
Abstract:The aim of this paper is to address the issue of linguistic competence
versus translation competence seen from a pedagogical perspective. I will start by
reviewing the well-known distinction between competence and performance and their
interrelatedness. Other dimensions will be added to linguistic competence, which
together contribute to the process of language learning (either foreign or second):
sociolingistic competence, pragmatic competence and intercultural competence. In
close connection with linguistic competence I will try to delineate the components of
translation competence, by outlining similarities and differences between the two
processes. Some elements of translation competence, apart from those that are also
inherent to linguistic competence will be analysed and exemplified: monitoring
competence, ICT competence and content-knowledge competence. From a pedagogic
viewpoint, in order for the students to attain a certain degree of translation
competence, their level of linguistic competence must be fairly well-developed (at
least upper-intermediate, or B2 according to the Common European Framework of
reference for languages); however, when learning how to translate, students have to
be able to further enhance their linguistic competence. Therefore, I will also attempt
at providing a basic teaching methodology involving the use of translation in
EFL/ESL classes, so as to increase students‘ both competences.
Key words: linguistic competence, sociolinguistic competence, pragmatic
competence, intercultural competence, translation competence.

I. Introduction
The relationship between linguistic competence and translation competence has been sparsely
addressed by various researchers, however, with differing standpoints. The use of translation in foreign
language classes was discarded as a teaching technique, especially after the grammar-translation
method had fallen into disuse, and the proponents of the communicative approach started to frown
upon teachers‘ resorting to L1 in their courses. Translation was entirely left to some specialist courses
in translation theory and practice, particularly in curricula destined for the formal training of translators
and interpreters. Nevertheless, as Rodgers (1986: 4) pointed out, ―Grammar Translation dominated
European and foreign language teaching from the 1840s to the 1940s, and in modified form it continues
to be widely used in some parts of the world today.‖
Our main tenet here is that by interspersing the foreign language class with translation tasks,
students will enhance both their linguistic and linguistic competences. We also start from the
assumption that in order for a translator from L1 into L2 to be successful, they need to master a
relatively independent-user stage in their language learning. This paper attempts at identifying the
constituent elements of both competences, and their interrelations. Further on, different teaching
methodologies used for the development of both linguistic and translation competences. In the end, a
possible model is presented and discussed.

II. Linguistic competence
For taxonomical reasons, I will employ the term ―linguistic competence‖ in order to refer to a
learner‘s ―knowledge of and ability to use, the formal resources from which well-formed, meaningful
messages may be assembled and formulated‖ (CEFR, 2001:109), as opposed to the knowledge and
skills required to deal with the social dimension of language use and/or the meaning and language use
that are dependent on the speaker, the addressee and other contextual features. It was Chomsky who
first made a distinction between competence (the system of linguistic knowledge) and performance (the
way the language system is used in communication):
Linguistic theory is concerned primarily with an ideal speaker-listener, in a completely
homogeneous speech-community, who knows its (the speech community‘s) language

1183

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
perfectly and is unaffected by such grammatically irrelevant conditions as memory
limitations, distractions, shifts of attention and interest, and errors (random or
characteristic) in applying his knowledge of the language in actual performance
(Chomsky, 1965:3).
The debate that ensued is well known to all scholars and students of linguistics. It was argued
that it is not possible to study language is such a ‗purified‘ environment‘, as pictured by Chomsky,
resting on the premise that a language without being used is no longer a language. The controversy was
likened by Cook (1996) to a war ―waged as much in language teaching, in children‘s languages, or in
computational linguistics, as it is in linguistics itself‖. Theoretical linguists, in particular, would
welcome such a separate approach, while applied linguists are strongly opposed to the idea of learning
a language as an abstract and isolated system. Other specialists scrutinised the issue from the
perspective of teaching materials elaboration. According to Allen (1975:40), most language textbooks
actually contain a limited number of completely abstract sentences or completely ‗authentic‘
utterances. The majority of classroom materials are based on sentences that are at the meeting point of
the two extremes.
It comes as no surprise that applied linguists would adopt a stance that favours second
language instruction which aims at achieving native speakers‘ competence in a language. Undoubtedly,
Chomsky‘s definition of language cannot be adopted as a language learning goal per se. It is not
possible to teach students the abstract forms and rules of language and expect them to be able to use the
language in real contexts in an appropriate manner. In Spolsky‘s (1972) words, linguistic competence
―is not enough for practical or educational purposes; we are interested not just in the fact that someone
knows a language but that he knows how to use it‖. Language instruction should assist the student in
competently using language forms, which can only come with practice and exposure to real-life
contexts. In this terrain of discontent, Hymes‘ concept of ‗communicative competence‘ seemed to
finally satisfy applied linguists. Stern (1992:73) points out Hymes‘ argument that besides linguistic
competence, the native speaker possesses another rule system, according to which, he intuitively knows
what is socially acceptable or unacceptable, and can adapt his language use according to the topic,
situation and human relations at stake. By the same token, Widdowson (1989) comments that ―Hymes
proposed his concept of communicative competence in reaction to Chomsky, and it is customary to
present it as an improvement in that it covers aspects of language other than the narrowly
grammatical‖. The concept of communicative competence, was nevertheless conceived from a
sociolinguist‘s perspective, and only starting with Canale &amp; Swain (1980) and Canale (1983) did this
approach enter the area of second/foreign language teaching and learning. According to them,
communicative competence is made of the following categories:
-

-

grammatical competence:
o phonology;
o vocabulary;
o syntax;
o semantics.
discourse competence - sociocultural rules having to do with language use;
sociolinguistic competence - rules of discourse such as cohesion and coherence,
strategic competence - the ability ―to compensate for breakdowns in communication‖ and
―to enhance the rhetorical effect of utterances‖ (Canale 1983:339).

How to integrate these elements into language learning goals is yet another issue. Widdowson
(1989:134) argues that ―[a]s soon as you talk about competence as ability, or what people can actually
do with their language, you get into all kinds of difficulty‖, since ―there is so much you have to allow
for in the way of individual differences, varying circumstances, attitude, and so on that specification
becomes impossible‖. According to him, ―grammar needs to be in its place‖, while at the same time
allowing for ―rightful claims of lexis‖, as the actual use of language may be more dependent on stocks
of lexical items rather than the analysis of structures. In this, he seems to accept the idea that linguistic
competence needs to be separated from language usage. Furthermore, Lyons (1996), departing from the
premise that there exists a psychological difference between propositional (or declarative) knowledge
(―knowing that something is or is not so‖) and performative (or procedural) knowledge (―knowing how
to do something‖), tries to investigate the type of knowledge that linguistic competence falls under. He
tends to consider it as a sort of procedural knowledge, i.e. being able to do something without being
able to pin down the underlying rules. According to him, it is not necessary for a language learner to
consciously ‗know‘ the language he internalises and to subsequently apply the rules, i.e. he does not
need to possess meta-knowledge when actually using the language in real-life situations.

1184

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Another second language education standpoint is provided by Brown (1996:202), who
constructs a developmental paradigm (a ―virtuous spiral‖, as she calls it), according to which a child
first manifests competence consisting of fundamental constraints on the nature of human languages.
Subsequently, the child‘s perception of the language which he/she is exposed to (performance) starts to
mould competence, and the process continues in the same manner, with more and more performance
changing performance. She maintains that ―just as performance modifies and restructures competence
in the first language, so it modifies and restructures competence in the second language‖. According to
this statement, mother tongue acquisition and second language acquisition rest on the same principles,
as competence is transferable language ability inherent in the human brain, working alike for first and
second language.
An even more complex model for language education is advanced by Bachman (1990),
through his hierarchical model of language competence, which is now divided into organisational
competence and pragmatic competence. The former represents grammatical competence and textual
competence; while pragmatic competence contains illocutionary competence and sociolinguistic
competence. These consist of the following categories:
- organisational competence:
o grammatical competence - ―the knowledge of vocabulary, morphology, syntax,
and phonology/graphology‖ (p. 87).
o textual competence - ―the knowledge of the conventions for joining utterances
together to form a text‖ (p. 88).
o illocutionary competence – the way we use words to do things, in terms of the
speech acts theory (Austin 1962) and/or language functions (Halliday 1973,
1976)
- sociolinguistic competence – the ability ―to perform language functions in ways that are
appropriate to that context‖ (p. 94).
More or less concurrently with the model developed by Bachman, the EU ‗Book‘ on language learning
and teaching – The Common European Framework of Reference for Languages was produced in order
to provide ―a common basis for the elaboration of language syllabuses, curriculum guidelines,
examinations, textbooks, etc. across Europe‖ (CEFR, 2001:1). According to this manual, the
communicative situations in which users and learners have to function entail the successful completion
of certain tasks and activities. To this end, they ―draw upon a number of competences developed in the
course of their previous experience‖ (CEFR, 2001: 101). At the same time, ―participation in
communicative events (including, of course, those events specifically designed to promote language
learning) results in the further development of the learner‘s competences, for both immediate and longterm use‖ (CEFR, 2001: 101). As a matter of fact, all human competences play a part in the language
user‘s ability to communicate, and can in turn be considered as components of the communicative
competence. Nevertheless, they may be categorized into competences more or less closely related to
the linguistic competence. Here is the classification offered by the CEFR:
A. General competences
Declarative knowledge (savoir)
Knowledge of the world
Sociocultural knowledge
Intercultural awareness
Skills and know-how (savoir-faire)
Practical skills and know-how
Intercultural skills and know-how
‗Existential‘ competence (savoir-être)
Ability to learn (savoir-apprendre)
Language and communication awareness
General phonetic awareness and skills
Study skills
Heuristic skills
B. Communicative language competences
Linguistic competences
Lexical competence;
Grammatical competence;
Semantic competence;
Phonological competence;
Orthographic competence;

1185

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Orthoepic competence.
Sociolinguistic competence
Politeness conventions
Expressions of folk wisdom
Register differences
Pragmatic competences
Discourse competence
Functional competence

III. Translation competence
Among the very few studies on translation competence development, mention should be made
of Campbell‘s (1998) research based on applied linguistics methodologies. He explored translation
competence of non-native speakers‘ translation from their mother tongue into English. His informants
were native speakers of Arabic, studying translation and interpretation at an Australian university. Data
analysis and interpretation led Campbell to design a three-layered model of translation competence:
- textual competence – the ability to produce TL texts with ―structural features of formal,
written English‖ (p. 73). Evaluation benchmarks are nominalizations, type/token ratios,
word length, passives, prepositional phrases, etc.
- disposition – translators‘ behaviours in choosing different words when contracting TL
texts.
The parameters he advances are:
o persistent vs capitulating;
o prudent vs risk-taking.
Combinations of the above categories will create four types of disposition:
o
persistent and risk-taking;
o
capitulating and risk-taking;
o
persistent and prudent;
o
capitulating and prudent.
-

monitoring competence, consisting of two sub-categories:
o
self-awareness;
o
editing.
o
However, this model overlooks the crucial issue of translation equivalence (grammatical, semantic,
pragmatic, cultural, etc.). A second model is provided by Sofer (1998), who puts forward ten
commandments for professional translators:
1. A thorough knowledge of both SL and TL;
2. A thorough ―at-homeness‖ in both cultures.
3. Keeping up with changes in the language and being up-to-date in all of its nuances and neologisms.
4. Always translating from another language into one‘s native language.
5. Being able to translate in more than one area of knowledge.
6. Possessing ease of writing or speaking and the ability to articulate quickly and accurately, either
orally or in writing.
7. Developing a good speed of translation.
8. Developing research skills, being able to retrieve reference sources needed in producing high quality
translation.
9. Being familiar with the latest technological advances;
10. Being able to understand the type of potential one‘s language specialty has in a certain geographic
area. (pp. 33-37)
If we analyse the two models, we would see most of the characteristics are pragmaticallyoriented, and refer to personal skills that translators need to possess/develop. However, we should not
overlook from among a translator‘s competence, the explicit ability to achieve equivalence at lexical,
semantic, textual (discursive), pragmatic (see Mona Baker, 1992), cultural level (see David Katan,
1999).
I reiterate the idea that translation competence cannot be achieved unless a translator already
possesses good knowledge of both SL and TL [by this meaning linguistic knowledge, on the one hand,
as well as socio-linguistic, pragmatic and (inter-)cultural knowledge]. I would like to state that at the
intersection of the two competences, we would find the above elements:

1186

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Fig. 1 Second language learning vs learning to translate
The other components of translation competence would be, in synthesis, content-knowledge
competence (economics, finance, medicine, law, etc.), ICT competence (hardware, operating system
environment, packages used: Windows, Trados, etc., the Internet); monitoring competence (awareness
of the quality of translations made) and research competence (the ability to resort to bibliographic and
lexicographic resources).
IV. Pedagogic implications
I suggest therefore that the translation theory and practice syllabus for language learners
should include as course aims the development of translation competence which includes all the
elements pertaining to language learning (linguistic competence – phonetics, morphology, syntax,
semantics, discourse; sociolinguistic competence; pragmatic competence and intercultural
competence), as well as sub-competence pertaining to the translation profession proper (contentknowledge competence; ICT competence, Research competence and monitoring competence), as
graphically represented in the figure below:

1187

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Fig. 2 Learning objectives for a translation course
Although there is relatively little research carried out in the field of teaching translation
proper, as opposed to teaching a foreign/second language, there are references to the use of translation
in different learning methodologies advocated by different stages in the history of foreign/second
language learning. As previously mentioned, the Grammar Translation method was the one which
made most use of translation in language instruction. It has numerous times come under attack, as it
only concentrates on grammar and vocabulary structure and is very far from the real task of translation,
being rather artificial. The typical exercise in this approach is ―to translate sentences from the target
language into the mother tongue‖ (Celce-Murcia, 1991), and its aim is to enforce ―the vocabulary and
grammar encountered in the current and earlier units‖ (Cook, 1998). Nevertheless, in recent years we
have witnessed a revival of interest in using translation as a classroom technique. Translation was not
encouraged by subsequent methodologies, such as the Direct Method, the Audio-Lingual Method
(where, according to Brookes, quoted in Richards &amp; Rodgers, 1986: 58, there existed ―practice in
translation only as a literary exercise at an advanced level‖), or Communicative Language Teaching. In
the Humanistic paradigm (Community Language Learning (CLL) and Suggestopedia, teachers resort
again to translation. In both methods, translation represents a sort of transition from the learner‘s
mother tongue to the target language, and through it, learners‘ anxieties can be diminished.
Translation tasks may interspersed in the language class, and it is particularly important to
choose authentic and relevant texts to be translated from and into the mother tongue, so as for the
students to understand the real usefulness and efficiency of good translation skills

Conclusions
I have tried to demonstrate through this paper that the role and importance of translation need
to be reassessed in the foreign/second language classroom. Alongside the language teaching/learning,
we need to try and develop students‘ translation competence as well. I have tried to decompose both
linguistic competence and the associated sociolinguistic, pragmatic and intercultural competences, as
well as give an inventory of elements that constitute the translation competence. It is argued that
translation competence encompasses the linguistic one, therefore, all instructors who want to teach
translation, need to pay heed first to students‘ foundation competences.

1188

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
References
Allen, J.P.B. (1975). Some basic concepts in linguistics. In J.P.B. Allen, &amp; S. Pit. Corder (Eds), The
Edinburgh Course in Applied Linguistics: Volume 2 (pp. 16-44). Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Austin, J. L. (1962/2005). How to do things with Words (2nd ed.). Cambridge (Mass.): Harvard
University Press.
Bachman, L. F. (1990). Fundamental considerations in language testing. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Baker, M. (1998). Translation studies. In M. Baker (Ed.), Routledge Encyclopaedia of Translation
Studies (pp. 277-280). London: Routledge.
Bassnett, S. (1991). Translation Studies. London: Routledge.
Brown, J. D. (1996). Testing in language programs. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall Regents.
Campbell, S. (1998). Translation into the Second Language. Harlow, Essex: Addison Wesley
Longman.
Canale, M. (1983). From communicative competence to communicative language pedagogy. In
J.C.Richards, &amp; R.W. Schmidt (Eds.), Language and communication. pp. 2-27. London &amp; New
York: Longman.
Canale, M., &amp; Swain, M. (1980). Theoretical bases of communicative approaches to Second Language
teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics. 1(1), 1-47.
Celce-Murcia, M. (1991). Language teaching approaches: an overview. In Teaching English as a
second or foreign language (2nd ed.) (pp. 3-11). Boston: Heinle &amp; Heinle.
Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press.
Council of Europe (2001). Common European Framework of Reference for Languages. Retrieved from
http://www.coe.int/t/dg4/linguistic/Source/Framework_EN.pdf.
Cook, G. (1998). Use of translation in language teaching. In M. Baker (Ed.), Routledge Encyclopaedia
of Translation Studies (pp. 277-280). London: Routledge.
Halliday, M.A.K. (1973). Explorations in the functions of language. London: Arnold. (Explorations in
Language Study Series).
Katan, D. (1999). Translating cultures. Manchester: St. Jerome Publishing.
Lyons, J. (1996). Semantics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Richards, J. C., &amp; Rodgers, T. S. (1986). Approaches and methods in language teaching: A description
and analysis. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rodgers, T. S. (1989). Syllabus design, curriculum development and polity determination. In R. K.
Johnson (Ed.), The Second Language Curriculum (pp. 24-34). Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Sofer, M. (1998). The Translator‘s Handbook (2nd ed). Rockville, Maryland: Schreiber Publishing,
Inc.
Spolsky, B. (1972). What does it mean to know a language? In K. Croft (Ed.) Readings on English as a
Second Language (pp. 26-42). Cambridge, Mass: Winthrop Publishers.
Stern, H.H. (1992). Issues and options in language teaching. (Series Eds. Patrick Allen &amp; Birgit
Harley). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Widdowson, H.G. (1989). Knowledge of language and ability for use. Applied Linguistics. 10(2), 128137.

1189

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21968">
                <text>560</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21969">
                <text>Linguistic competence vs. Translation competence: A pedagogic  approach</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21970">
                <text>Popescu, Teodora</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21971">
                <text>The aim of this paper is to address the issue of linguistic competence  versus translation competence seen from a pedagogical perspective. I will start by  reviewing the well-known distinction between competence and performance and their  interrelatedness. Other dimensions will be added to linguistic competence, which  together contribute to the process of language learning (either foreign or second):  sociolingistic competence, pragmatic competence and intercultural competence. In  close connection with linguistic competence I will try to delineate the components of  translation competence, by outlining similarities and differences between the two  processes. Some elements of translation competence, apart from those that are also  inherent to linguistic competence will be analysed and exemplified: monitoring  competence, ICT competence and content-knowledge competence. From a pedagogic  viewpoint, in order for the students to attain a certain degree of translation  competence, their level of linguistic competence must be fairly well-developed (at  least upper-intermediate, or B2 according to the Common European Framework of  reference for languages); however, when learning how to translate, students have to  be able to further enhance their linguistic competence. Therefore, I will also attempt  at providing a basic teaching methodology involving the use of translation in  EFL/ESL classes, so as to increase students‘ both competences.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21972">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21973">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2827" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3598">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/45702958ffbc3b4de30388d481ad5fd4.pdf</src>
        <authentication>9b64b288f39d434086d4d51b6a5b22bb</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21967">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Adult Education: Using Motivating Strategies and Techniques
Alma Piric
Department of English Language and Literature
University of Zenica, Bosnia and Herzegovina
almapiric@gmail.com
Abstract:Motivation is a key to success. It helps us understand why we do the things
we do, or why we learn and thrive to further develop our abilities to do something. In
language learning motivation plays a crucial role, because only the motivated students
will succeed. Without motivation our performance is diminished. Learners who are
not motivated tend to be distracted, bored, unfocused, and even frustrated. On the
other hand, motivated learners are eager to find out more, learn new things, pay
attention in class and conduct additional research at home in order to better
understand a given topic. That is why many teachers/instructors consider motivation
a crucial part of the instructional process. As teachers/instructors, we can certainly
contribute to the motivation of our students. We can motivate learners through
interesting classes, positive attitude as well as attractive exercises. This paper will
look into different types of motivation and their influence on the learners as well as
some techniques and strategies teachers/instructors can use to motivate their students.
Keywords: Adult education, andragogy, motivation

Introduction
Knowing what motivation is and that there are different types of motivations is not enough. Instructors
need to find out more, explore what they can do to further motivate their students and thus help them learn not
only the language they teach but also some skills that will help the learners in real life situations. There are some
common characteristics as well as strategies and techniques that every instructor can learn in order to make the
language learning experience a successful one for both the learner and the instructor.
Types of motivations:
According to Gardner and Lambert (1972) there are two main types of motivation: integrative and
instrumental motivation. Integrative motivation is the desire to become one with the target-language culture,
while instrumental motivation reflects the desire to succeed in a field of study or at workplace. Although these
are important distinctions, teachers rather look at motivation as intrinsic and extrinsic, the first one being the
cognitive drive that pushes the learner to learn for his/her own sake, whereas the extrinsic motivation is derived
from external incentives, for example if a learner completes a language course he/she will get a promotion.
Intrinsically motivated learners believe in what they are doing and consider it worthwhile. Extrinsically
motivated learners do not learn because they want to. They learn because they expect a reward, praise from their
parents or a promotion at workplace. Brown (1987) make s a distinction between global, situational, and task
motivation. While the global motivation reflects the overall attitude of the learner toward language learning,
situational motivation focuses on the context in which the learner finds him/herself. Task motivation is the most
focused on, analyzing how the learner approaches a specific task.
Types of learners:
There is a huge difference between pedagogy (the study of teaching children) and andragogy (the study
of teaching adults). While pedagogy has to reflect on the learner‘s abilities and attention spans at a given age,
andragogy focuses on learners who can greatly contribute through collaboration with the instructor as well as
each other. Andragogy recognizes the maturity of an adult learner. Given the maturity level of the learners, the
classes can be learner centered. Instructors can conduct a survey at the beginning of the given course to find out
what the adult learners would like to learn (in this case the learners do not determine the overall course
description, but rather the focus of the lessons in a given field of studies). Another benefit of adult learners is
that they bring in past experiences, which can for example confirm some of the theoretical parts of the course.
At the end of each course, the learners can evaluate the course and make suggestions as to where they would like
to see improvements. The instructors can then redesign the course based on these evaluations.

96

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Being a Motivating Language Instructor:
No matter which type of motivation, one is clear; the learners have a reason for taking a language
course, and it is up to the instructor to help the student reach their goal. So how do we recognize motivated
learners? A motivated learner is someone who is willing to take risks and appreciates challenges. He or she
promotes a positive self-image and has specific goals that he/she wants to reach. A motivated learner is
ambitious and not discouraged when he/she makes mistakes. But motivated learners are not a recipe for a
successful language course, the language instructor needs to be motivated as well. Here are some common
characteristics that can be learned for the purpose of becoming a motivating language instructor.
1. Offer expertise (both knowledge and preparation)
Learners deserve to have knowledgeable and prepared instructors. An instructor does not need to have
the knowledge of all things, but at the same time, it is wise to review some grammar points or the essay structure
prior to teaching them. There are times when the instructor simply does not have the answer to a question the
learner raises. There is no need to be ashamed; instead the instructor can use it to his/her advantage. Tell the
student that you do not have the answer right at that moment, but that you will look it up and answer it next time
you have class. You can then make a whole lesson about it if you feel that the rest of the learners would also
benefit from knowing this.
Instructors whose native language is not English should not feel uncomfortable if they do not know how
to pronounce something. All they need to do is spend more time preparing for the class. Today, there are many
online dictionaries that not only provide the definition, but also the pronunciation of a given word.
An instructor‘s job is not only to be present in class, but also to prepare for it. Every now and then we
all improvise, but it is unfair to the learners if the instructor constantly improvises. Just as the learners are
dedicating their time and effort into the course they are taking, the instructors are expected to invest time in
preparing the lessons. Adult learners are more likely to notice it if the instructor is unprepared. This will
certainly cause them to be less motivated in class.
NOTE: Too many ―ums‖ and ―ahs‖ may cause your adult learners to question your competence.
2. Have empathy
Adult learners are most likely parents and have jobs. The instructors need to keep that in mind. Instead
of assigning lots of homework, the instructor can design the class so that most of the work is done there and then.
It is important to have rules, but at the same time, when it comes to adult learners, the instructors have to be
more flexible with the schedule and the attendance. Afternoon and late evening courses are better than morning
classes for those who are employed. Attendance should be taken seriously, but the instructors need to
understand that every parent will spend time with a sick child rather than attend a class. The instructors can ask
that the learners notify them if they will miss a class, so that the instructor can adjust the lesson or some of the
activities (if necessary) to a smaller group of students.
3.

Be enthusiastic

If we show that we love what we do, people will notice and approach it with a positive attitude.
Instructors need to be enthusiastic about their positions and transfer the positive attitude to their students.
Grammar is dry, but with the right approach, the instructor can make it fun and thus more interesting.
4.

Be clear

Instructors should use the power of language and organization to make sure that every aspect of their
course is clear. A very helpful tool is a syllabus. If it is clearly written, distributed at the very beginning of the
course and followed by the instructor there will be less confusion.
Additional Motivating Strategies:
In addition to the motivation that the learner brings to the classroom, teachers can contribute through
interesting lessons, as well as positive feedback. How do we make sure that we add to learner‘s motivation?
There are several strategies and techniques that guaranty success and thus motivate students.
1.

Friendly atmosphere

Learners need to feel recognized and valued. Learning is much easier if the learners feel safe and
comfortable. Sometimes it is not enough to praise correct answers only. Instructors need to pay close attention

97

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
to learner‘s progress and acknowledge it. It is not always the matter of grading. Instructors can simply point out
that the progress is noticeable by nodding when the learner raises his/her hand and thus acknowledging the
learner. These seemingly small gestures help the learner build confidence and further develop his/her intrinsic
motivation, as well as encourage him/her to participate more.
NOTE: Some instructors tend to push their students. This approach my actually help in a given situation, but the
downside of it is that the learners do not learn to be responsible, because every time they are in the classroom
setting the instructor pushes them to produce language, for example.
2. Sense of accomplishment
Another way to ensure motivation is through tests and competitions. Learners want a reward, and in the
classroom the reward comes in form of a grade. So, testing and grading students will certainly be a motivating
factor. Though taken individually, tests are used to compare the learners‘ abilities. Instead of focusing on tests
only, instructors can also organize competitions through which the learners will have an opportunity to present
their knowledge. If the individual learners do not feel comfortable being on their own in a competition, they can
be paired up, or even put into small groups. If the competition is not graded, the instructors can come up with a
small reward, such as movie theater tickets or a book for each member of the group that has won the
competition. If the student who usually does not win or get a very high grade finds him/herself on the winning
team, he/she will be intrinsically motivated to continue the good work, as they will feel the sense of
accomplishment.
3.

Connecting language to learner‘s interests and needs outside of class

Each learner has interests outside of class. Instructors can ask the learners to share those and then focus
the lessons on these topics. For example, if the learners play a particular sport, the instructor can create a lesson
on the history of the given sport. Lots of times, the learners do not have the necessary vocabulary to describe
things, so the instructor can ask that each learner prepares a short presentation in which he/she will present their
favorite sport (how it‘s played, what the rules are, naming some teams and competitions, etc.).
4.

Creating life situations in the classroom

Adult learners usually take language courses to improve their skills for a specific purpose. A lawyer
may have some new clients who speak another language; a businessman may be conducting business with
foreigners and feels the need to speak their language. If, at the beginning of the course, the learners share the
purpose of their language learning, the instructor can make connections to their needs. For example, one whole
class can be dedicated to teaching learners how to make phone calls and leave a message. Adult learners
appreciate the pragmatic aspects of a class, especially if they end up using the things they have learned in class in
real life situations.
Conclusion:
It can be concluded that along with the intrinsic and the extrinsic motivation that the learner brings to a
language course, the instructor can also greatly contribute by offering expertise, having empathy, being
enthusiastic, and clear. There are also some additional strategies and techniques such as creating a friendly
atmosphere, acknowledging the progress a learner has made, basing the lessons on the learners‘ interests outside
of class, and or creating real life situations in the classroom to teach learners how to handle them in a foreign
language, that can contribute to the learners‘ existing motivation to learn. Instructors should be aware of the fact
that all these skills and characteristics can be easily learned. They need to keep an open mind and be willing to
try the suggested strategies and techniques.

98

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
References
Brown, H.D. (2000). Principles of Language Learning and Teaching (4th ed.). Englewood Cliffs NJ: PrenticeHall.
Ellis, R. (1986). Understanding Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Ellis, R. (1994). The Study of Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Gardner, R.C., &amp; Lambert, W.E. (1972). Attitudes and Motivation: Second Language Learning. Newbury House.
Larson-Freeman, D., &amp; Long, M.H. (1994). An Introduction to Second Language Acquisition Research.
Longman.

99

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21961">
                <text>18</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21962">
                <text>Adult Education: Using Motivating Strategies and Techniques</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21963">
                <text>Piric, Alma</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21964">
                <text>Motivation is a key to success. It helps us understand why we do the things  we do, or why we learn and thrive to further develop our abilities to do something. In  language learning motivation plays a crucial role, because only the motivated students  will succeed. Without motivation our performance is diminished. Learners who are  not motivated tend to be distracted, bored, unfocused, and even frustrated. On the  other hand, motivated learners are eager to find out more, learn new things, pay  attention in class and conduct additional research at home in order to better  understand a given topic. That is why many teachers/instructors consider motivation  a crucial part of the instructional process. As teachers/instructors, we can certainly  contribute to the motivation of our students. We can motivate learners through  interesting classes, positive attitude as well as attractive exercises. This paper will  look into different types of motivation and their influence on the learners as well as  some techniques and strategies teachers/instructors can use to motivate their students</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21965">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21966">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2826" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3597">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/1d0e8b168c49cc12aa4d1305781245b7.pdf</src>
        <authentication>15e6a8034e20e126680ac7fbe3ef62bc</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21960">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

LeksiĦke greške u studentskim prevodima sa italijanskog jezika
Deja PiletiĤ
Faculty of Philosophy, NikńiĤ
University of Montenegro, Montenegro
dejacet@t-com.me

Abstract: This paper deals with classification and explanation of the reasons of the most
frequent lexical errors which occur in the translations of the undergraduate students of the
Department of Italian Language and Literature (University of Montenegro). The corpus of
the research consists of the written translations from the Italian as a foreign language into
the Montenegrin as a mother tongue. The translations have been made in class, at home
and during the exams on the second and the third year of the mentioned courses of
undergraduate studies.
Key words: pedagogical translation, translation, lexical errors, error analysis

Ovaj rad nastoji da razvrsta, opińe i objasni najĦeńĤe leksiĦke greńke koje se srijeĤu u studentskim
prevodima sa italijanskog jezika i predstavlja dio jednog sveobuhvatnijeg istraņivanja, koje ima za cilj analizu i
klasifikaciju najuĦestalijih prevodnih greńaka karakteristiĦnih za razliĦite jeziĦke nivoe. Korpus na kome se
navedeno istraņivanje sprovodi obuhvata prevode studenata II i III godine osnovnih studija na Odsjeku za
italijanski jezik i knjiņevnost Filozofskog fakulteta Univerziteta Crne Gore.
U nastojanju da pribliņimo kontekst spomenutog istraņivanja, u uvodnom dijelu rada reĤi Ĥemo neńto o
ńkolskom prevoħenju i o ciljevima koji se njegovom primjenom u nastavi ņele postiĤi.

1. Školsko prevoħenje i školski prevod
Iako je u okvirima razliĦitih lingvistiĦkih teorija i glotodidaktiĦkih metoda Ħesto dovoħen u pitanje,
dugotrajan i kompleksan odnos izmeħu prevoħenja i nastave stranih jezika nikad nije u potpunosti prekinut, a
gledano iz perspektive savremenih nauĦnih saznanja Ħini se da je ovaj odnos prirodan, te da do njegovog prekida
ne moņe i ne treba ni da doħe. ĥak i kada je, u jeku popularnosti audiovizuelnog metoda i prilikom raħanja
komunikativnog pristupa, prevoħenje u svakom svom obliku bilo odbacivano iz nastave stranih jezika, ono nikad
nije u potpunosti napustilo nastavni proces, posebno kada je u pitanju izuĦavanje jezika na univerzitetskom
nivou.
Danas je sve veĤi broj autora, koji nastoje da uklone talog nevjerice i nepovjerenja u odnosu na prevoħenje u
didaktici stranih jezika za Ħije je nastajanje odgovorna upravo njegova neumjerena i neadekvatna upotreba u
okvirima i u maniru gramatiĦko-prevodnog metoda. ZasnivajuĤi svoje stavove i argumente na rezultatima
modernih istraņivanja na polju nauke o prevoħenju, kognitivne lingvistike i metodike nastave, ovi autori58
pozivaju na preispitivanje i ponovno vrednovanje znaĦaja, uloge i mjesta prevoħenja u savremenoj
glotodidaktici. Oni na razliĦite naĦine nastoje da dokaņu da, ukoliko se primjenjuje na pravi naĦin, s pravim
ciljem i u pravoj mjeri, prevoħenje moņe da bude od velike koristi i da pruņi odliĦne rezultate u uĦenju i nastavi
stranih jezika.
PojaĦano interesovanje za prevoħenje, naroĦito u posljednje tri decenije, povezano je, meħutim, ne
samo sa njegovom didaktiĦkom ulogom veĤ i sa njegovom didaktikom. Naime, s poveĤanjem svijesti o znaĦaju
prevoħenja, ubrzano se razvija nauka o prevoħenju, a sama djelatnost uzdignuta je na akademski nivo.
Profesionalnim prevodiocem postaje se, dakle, sticanjem univerzitetske diplome mahom specijalistiĦkih i
postdiplomskih studija, a prevoħenje se doņivljava kao vjeńtina za koju nije dovoljan samo prirodni talenat, veĤ
koja se stiĦe kombinovanjem teorijskih znanja i prakse.
Dakle, u kontekstu prevoħenja i nastave moņemo govoriti o prevoħenju kao „sredstvu― i prevoħenju kao
„cilju―, o ńkolskom (gloto-didaktičkom) odnosno profesionalnom (stručno-didaktičkom) prevoħenju, tj. o
58

Calvi (2003), Gonzales Davies (2004), Sewell (2004), Carreres (2006), Di Sabato (2007), Landone (2008), House (2009),
itd.

350

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
prevoħenju u funkciji jeziĦke vjeņbe, provjere znanja i objańnjenja pojedinih jeziĦkih sadrņaja59 na jednoj i
prevodilaĦkoj kompetenciji kao svrsi i glavnom cilju upotrebe prevoħenja u nastavnom procesu na drugoj strani.
U istom kontekstu pravi se razlika izmeħu ńkolskog i profesionalnog prevoda. Naime, preneseno na
univerzitetski nivo sticanja znanja iz jezika odnosno iz prevoħenja, studentski prevod koji nastaje kao proizvod
prevoħenja na osnovnim univerzitetskim studijama bliņi je ńkolskom, dok je studenstki prevod na
specijalistiĦkim ili master studijama prevoħenja bliņi profesionalnom, iako se sa njim joń uvijek ne moņe
poistovjetiti.
Pojedini autori insinsistiraju na jasnoj distinkciji izmeħu gloto-didaktiĦkog i struĦno-didaktiĦkog
prevoħenja. Ne ņeleĤi da negiramo razliku, koja nesumnjivo postoji, mi dijelimo mińljenje onih koji dovode u
pitanje potrebu i uopńte moguĤnost povlaĦenja ońtre granice izmeħu njih 60. Naime, upotrebom ńkolskog
prevoħenja, koje svakako prethodi profesionalnom, kroz praktiĦan rad61, zajedno sa jeziĦkim, studenti se po
prirodi stvari istovremeno upuĤuju u prevodilaĦki proces i neizbjeņno upoznaju neke od osnovnih prevodilaĦkih
vjeńtina. To, po nańem mińljenju, svakako treba posmatrati kao dodatnu korist. Na ovakvom stavu zasnovani su i
ciljevi vjeņbi prevoħenja u okviru osnovnih studija na Katedri za italijanski jezik i knjiņevnost Filozofskog
fakulteta Univerziteta Crne Gore.

2. Ciljevi školskog prevoħenja sa stranog na maternji jezik
Dva su osnovna cilja koja se ņele postiĤi ovom vrstom prevoħenja:
- Usvajanje, upotreba, utvrħivanje i prońirivanje znanja koja se tiĦu italijanskog jezika i kulture;
- Usmjeravanje studenata ka sticanju sposobnosti reprodukovanja ciljnog teksta funkcionalno
ekvivalentnog sa izvornim.
Iako je drugi od navedena dva cilja vezan prije svega za pofesionalno prevoħenje i podrazumijeva
vladanje vińim stupnjevima jeziĦke kompetencije, smatramo da ga nije nemoguĤe dostiĤi ni na nivou o kojem mi
ovdje govorimo. Treba imati u vidu, naime, da je ovdje rijeĦ o prevoħenju autorskih tekstova 62 (kraĤi odlomci iz
savrmenih knjiņevnih djela i novinskih Ħlanaka) Ħiji je izbor uslovljen predviħenim nivoom jeziĦke kompetencije
studenata druge, odnosno treĤe godine osnovnih studija Italijanistike. Tome ide u prilog i Ħinjenica da se prevodi
na maternji jezik, pa se pretpostavlja sposobnost studenta-prevodioca i da intuitivno bira elemente iz jeziĦkog
repertoara sopstvenog jezika.
Gore navedeni ciljevi, dakle, podrazumijevaju:

razvoj jeziĦkog znanja na svim nivoima;

razvoj kompetencije razumijevanja pisanog teksta;

usavrńavanje kompetencija vezanih za maternji jezik;

upuĤivanje studenata ka nekim od osnovnih nivoa prevodilaĦke kompetencije:
-upoznavanje sa prvim koracima u pocesu povezivanja izvornog i ciljnog teksta;
-razvijanje kreativnosti, upornosti, samokritike, samouvjerenosti;
razvijanje autonomije;
-razvijanje sposobnosti da se prepoznaju pojedini prevodilaĦki problemi i
sposobnosti njihovog prevazilaņenja;
-upoznavanje studenata sa razliĦitim savremenim prevodilaĦkim pomagalima i sa njihovom
upotrebom.
Treba svakako napomenuti da su ciljevi ovdje predstavljeni uopńteno, te da se u zavisnosti od nivoa
studija (II ili III godina) prednost daje jednima u odnosu na druge.

59

Eksplikativno prevoħenje.
U tom smislu slaņemo se sa Carreresovom:―Modern language departments cannot and should not try to double up as
translator training institutions. However, I believe that bringing classroom work closer to the professional world can only be
of benefit to our students. In my view, the divide between the teaching of translation as a language learning tool and as a
professional activity has been overemphasized to the point of preventing useful dialogue and exchange‖. (Carreres 2006:12)
61
Nagalńavamo kroz praktičan rad iz razloga ńto na osnovnim studijama nijesu predviħeni predmeti koji se tiĦu opńte teorije
prevoħenja, prevodilaĦkih tehnika, analize teksta i sl, a koji se podrazumijevaju na kursevima za obuĦavanje profesionalnih
prevodilaca.
62
Suprotno od gramatiĦko-prevodnog matoda koji podrazumijeva prevoħenje vjeńtaĦkih, dekontekstualizovanih reĦenica, ili
tekstova nastalih u namjeri da se izvjeņba odreħeno gramatiĦko pravilo.
60

351

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
3. Evaluacija školskog prevoda
Evaluacija tj. provjera kvaliteta prevoda kljuĦni je pojam koji se tiĦe kako ńkolskog tako i
profesionalnog prevoħenja. BuduĤi da ove dvije vrste prevoħenja u osnovi imaju razliĦite ciljeve, razliĦitu
publiku i razliĦite „ocjenjivaĦe‖, ocjena kvaliteta prevoda kao njihovih ishoda zasniva se na razliĦitim
kriterijumima i nema istu svrhu.
Ranije u tekstu smo spomenuli da je jedna od funkcija pedagońkog prevoħenja provjera znanja i
napretka kod studenata u dostizanju ciljeva odreħenih nastavnim planom. Ova provjera ne podrazumijeva uvijek
dodjelu ocjena i kredita, ona se sprovodi tokom cijele ńkolske godine kako bi usmjerila dalji rad kako studenata,
tako i profesora.
U namjeri da, izmeħu ostalog, utvrdimo i koje su to najvece prepreke na putu ka postizanju navedenih
ciljeva, pokrenuli smo nańe istraņivanje na korpusu studentskih prevoda. Ovom prilikom, baviĤemo se, kao ńto
smo na samom poĦetku rekli, najĦeńĤim leksiĦkim greńkama i njihovim uzrocima.

4. Korpus studentskih prevoda
Korpus istraņivanja Ħine studentski prevodi raħeni na kolokvijumima, pismenim vjeņbama, zavrńnim
ispitima i pismenim domaĤim i ńkolskim zadacima, u toku ńkolske 2008/2009. i 2010/2011. godine.
RijeĦ je o prevodima odlomaka savremenih knjiņevnih djela i novinskih Ħlanaka, prilagoħenih
planiranom i pretpostavljenom nivou jeziĦke i, uslovno reĦeno, prevodilaĦke kompetencije, studenata druge i
treĤe godine.
Od prevodilaĦkih pomagala na ispitima i kolokvijuma studenti se koriste jednojeziĦkim rjeĦnicima,
prilikom rada na Ħasu raspolaņu i pristupom internetu.
5. Binarne i ne-binarne greške
U teņnji da napravi razliku izmeħu prevodilaĦkih i jeziĦkih greńaka u studentskim prevodima, Antony
Pym (1992:280) nudi jednu opńtu podjelu na „binarne― (binary) i „ne-binarne― greńke (non-binary errors). Ova
podjela zasnovana je na autorovoj opńtoj definiciji prevodilaĦke kompetencije, koja po njemu predstavlja
jednistvo sljedeĤe dvije vjeńtine:
-vjeńtine stvaranja niza ciljnih tekstova - target texts (TT1, TT2...TTn) kao ekvivalenata za jedan izvorni tekst –
source text (ST) i
-vjeńtine izdvajanja samo jednog iz spomenutog niza ciljnih telstova, u odnosu na posebnu namjenu i ciljnu
publiku izvornog teksta.
Osnovna razlika izmeħu ove dvije vrste greńaka je sljedeĤa: „binarne― greńke uzrokovane su izborom
pogreńnog odgovora, a „ne-binarne― ne predstavljaju pogreńan odgovor, veĤ samo jedan od moguĤih, ali ne i
najprihvatljiviji.
A binary error opposes a wrong answer to the right answer; non-binarism requires that the TT actually
selected be opposed to at least one further TT1 which could also have been selected, and then to possible wrong
answers. For binarism, there is only right and wrong, for non-binarism, there are at least two right answers and
then the wrong ones. (Pym 1992: 282)
5.1. Binarne greške
LeksiĦke greńke koje Ĥemo analizirati na korpusu studentskih prevoda, prema ovoj podjeli, spadaju
najveĤim dijelom u „binarne― greńke, tj. greńke uzrokovane pogreńnim prevodom odreħene rijeĦi ili izraza u
datom kontekstu. Pod pogreńnim prevodom u ovom sluĦaju podrazumijevamo potpunu promjenu znaĦenja rijeĦi.
NajrazliĦitije uzroke ove vrste greńaka mogli bismo svesti na pet opńtih:
-nedovoljno vladanje kompetencijom Ħitanja tj. razumijevanja teksta63;
-praznine u jeziĦkom znanju na razliĦitim nivoima (sintaktiĦkom, leksiĦkom, morfolońkom);
-stvaranje laņnih parova/laņnih prijatelja/kalkova
-nedovoljno razvijene neke od osnovih prevodilaĦkih potkompetencija (prije svega vjeńtine pravilne upotrebe
prevodilaĦkih pomagala) i osobina poput istrajnosti i preciznosti;
-praznine u enciklopedijskom znanju (znanje iz opńte kulture), neobavijeńtenost.
5.2. Ne-binarne greške

63

Evropski jeziĦki portfolio (Little, Perclova 2003: 116, 120) za nivoe jeziĦke kompetencije B2 i C1, Ħije je dostizanje
predviħeno u toku II i III godine osnovnih studija, kada je u pitanju vjeńtina Ħitanja, podrazumijeva, izmeħu ostalih i sljedeĤe
sposobnosti: „Mogu da razumijem Ħlanke i izvjeńtaje o aktuelnim temama u kojima se izraņavaju posebni stavovi i brane
odreħene pozicije. Mogu da razumijem specijalizovane Ħlanke izvan mog domena, pod uslovom da mogu s vremena na
vrijeme da se posluņim rjeĦnikom― odnosno: „Sa lakoĤom mogu da Ħitam savremene knjiņevne tekstove. Mogu da
prepoznam druńtveni, politiĦki ili istorijski kontekst nekog knjiņevnog djela. Mogu da se udaljim od fabule u nekom
literarnom teksu i prepoznam poruke, ideje i implicitne odnose. Mogu da razumijem kompleksne tekstove izvjesne duņine―.

352

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Na istom korpusu uoĦili smo i „ne-binarne― greńke tj. one koje su, uslovno reĦeno, vińe prevodilaĦke
nego jeziĦke prirode. Za nańu analizu one su takoħe bitne, buduĤi da prevoħenje na univerzitetskim studijama
jezika, kao ńto smo ranije napomenuli, podrazumijeva i upuĤivanje studenata u proces prevoħenja i u neke od
osnovnih prevodilaĦkih tehnika.
U ovu vrstu greńaka moņemo svrstati prevode koji naruńavaju stil ciljnog teksta, ili njegovu
pragmatiĦku funkciju, ali ne i njegov smisao.
ĥesta pojava u studentskim prevodima jeste i izostavljanje pojedinih rijeĦi i suprotno, dodavanje vińe
varijanti prevoda jedne iste rijeĦi. Uzroke nastanka ovih greńaka pronalazimo u nedostatku upornosti, istrajnosti,
kreativnosti i samouvjerenosti, osobina koje podrazumijeva prevodilaĦka kompetencija.
6. Omaške
Nepreciznost, brzopletost, dekoncentrisanost stoje u osnovi omańki. Ove izazivaju pogreńan prevod,
koji polazeĤi sa nivoa rijeĦi nerijetko uzrokuje niz greńaka na razliĦitim jeziĦkim nivoima. Na ovaj naĦin kao
proizvod prevodilaĦkog procesa dobijamo tekst sa promijenjenim smislom, ili joń ĦeńĤe, tekst lińen smisla.
7. Klasifikacija leksiĦkih grešaka prema uzroku nastanka
U prethodnom poglavlju nastojali smo da pobrojimo opńte uzroke nastanka jeziĦkih i prevodilaĦkih
greńaka i omańki na nivou leksike.
Sada Ĥemo nastojati da ih klasifikujemo nezavisno od njihove prirode i teņine. U ovu klasifikaciju Ĥemo
uvrstiti i omańke, s obzirom da imaju ozbiljne posljedice po smisao ciljnog teksta. Sve Ĥemo potkrijepiti
primjerima pronaħenim u okviru istraņivaĦkog korpusa.
LeksiĦke greńke o kojima je rijeĦ karakterińu oba prethodno spomenuta nivoa uĦenja jezika. NeĤemo,
meħutim, praviti poreħenja u cilju utvrħivanja koje su od njih prisutnije na niņem, odnosno na vińem nivou. To
ostavljamo za neku drugu priliku.
Neophodno je takoħe napomenuti da je u priliĦno velikom broju sluĦajeva leksiĦka greńka uzrokovana
spregom vińe razliĦitih uzroka, kao i to da jedna greńka Ħesto za sobom vuĦe niz drugih. To Ĥe se uostalom
vidjeti i u samim primjerima.
7.1. Stvaranje laţnih parova
Kod Ivira (1984: 106) nailazimo na sljedeĤu definiciju: „Laņni parovi su parovi jeziĦnih (ne samo
leksiĦkih) jedinica u dva razna jezika koje imaju neńto zajedniĦkog, ali nisu u svemu jednake―. Isti autor dalje
navodi: „DjelimiĦna sliĦnost jeziĦkih jedinica na kojoj prevodilac gradi svoje shvaĤanje o njihovoj jednakosti
moņe biti u sliĦnosti oblika [...], zatim u zajedniĦkom metajeziĦkom nazivu koji obuhvaĤa obje jedinice [...], te
napokon u nekim, ali ne svim aspektima semantiĦkog sadrņaja [...]―.
Laņni parovi su najizrazitiji upravo na nivou leksike.
Ivir (1984: 108-122) navodi sljedeĤe vrste laņnih parova koje odlikuje isti ili sliĦan oblik:
1. Laņni parovi s jednakim znaĦenjima
2. Laņni parovi sa sasvim razliĦitim znaĦenjima
3. Laņni parovi sa djelimiĦnim poklapanjem u znaĦenju
4. Izmińljeni parovi
7.1.1. Laţni parovi sa istim znaĦenjem
To su parovi rijeĦi dva razliĦita jezika koje imaju sliĦan oblik i isto znaĦenje, ńto, meħutim, ne znaĦi da
ih odlikuje ista upotrebna vrijednost i kolokacijski potencijal tj. moguĤnost kombinovanja sa drugim rijeĦima i
stvaranje manje ili vińe Ħvrstih leksiĦkih sklopova. (Ivir:108).

laņni par

izraz karakteristiĦan
za

netaĦan prevod

predloņeno rjeńenje

lansirati alarm

diĤi uzbunu

italijanski novinski
jezik
lanciare – lansirati
allarme - alarm

lanciare l'allarme

(II i III god.)

LeksiĦki parovi sa istim/sliĦnim oblikom i istim znaĦenjem Ħesto pripadaju tzv. internacionalizmima –
rijeĦima koje su Ħesto oba jezika preuzela iz nekog treĤeg. Ukoliko se ne radi o struĦnim tekstovima, stilskom
nivou ciljnog teksta najĦeńĤe odgovara domaĤi termin (pod pretpostavkom da postoji). Evo nekoliko primjera
takvih parova koje nalazimo na obraħenom korpusu:

353

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

internacionalizmi

primjer

moguĤa prevodna rjeńenja

internazionale:

...l'agenzia internazionale per l'energia
atomica...

...internacionalna (bolje:
meĎunarodna) agencija za
atomsku energiju...(III god)

contaminare:

...il tratto immediatamente antistante

...pojas neposredno preko

kontaminirati

la centrale di Fukushima [...]

zagaditi

è fortemente contaminato.

puta centrale u Fukuńimi [...]
jako je

internacionalni
meħunarodni

kontaminiran (bolje: zagaĎen).
(III god.)
SliĦno je i sa primjerom: adolescenza - adolescencija (pubertet), immaginazione-imaginacija (mašta) i sl.
7.1.2. Laţni parovi sa sasvim razliĦitim znaĦenjima
To su parovi koji imaju sliĦan oblik, ali im se znaĦenja ne preklapaju. (Ivir: 109)

laņni par

reĦenica

netaĦan prevod

Se accetti oltre

Stipendio- stipendija ad avere un aumento
notevole
stipendio...

di

Ako prihvatiń, osim ńto
Ĥeń imati
znaĦajno veĤu stipendiju...
(II god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje
Ako prihvatiń, osim
ńto Ĥeń imati

znaĦajno veĤu
platu...

SliĦno je i sa pogreńnim prevodnim sparivanjima poput: frase-fraza, evidenziare-evidentirati i sl. na
koje smo naińli prilikom analize nańeg korpusa.
Ova vrsta greńaka ne nastaje, meħutim samo usljed homonimije/homofonije meħu rijeĦima maternjeg i
stranog jezika koji se uĦi, veĤ moņe nastati i usljed negativne interferencije iz nekog drugog stranog jezika kojim
studenti (djelimiĦno ili u potpunosti) vladaju: caldo-cold (engl.), parente- parent (engl.), matto- mattar (španski)
itd.

laņni par

reĦenica

Matto - lud

Il re che andava matto
per quella figliuola...

Mattar - ubiti

7.1.3.

netaĦan prevod
Kralj, koji bi ubio
zbog te djevojĦice...
(II god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje

Kralj, koji je bio lud za
tom djevojĦicom...

Laţni parovi sa djelimiĦnim poklapanjem u znaĦenju

Kako Ivir (111) navodi, laņni parovi sa djelimiĦnim poklapanjem znaĦenja rijetko se spominju kao laņni
parovi, ali su ipak oni potencijalno daleko opasniji kao izvor prevodnih greńaka nego pravi laņni parovi. Ovu
Ħinjenicu autor objańnjava psiholońkim razlozima koji su, kada je u pitanju pogreńno poistovjeĤivanje leksiĦkih

354

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
jedinica iz dva jezika znatno jaĦi nego u sluĦaju laņnih parova sa sasvim razliĦitim znaĦenjem, buduĤi da, kako
on kaņe, ovdje djeluje i pritisak sliĦnog oblika i zajedniĦkog dijela znaĦenja.
predloņeno rjeńenje

laņni par

primjer iz prevoda

netaĦan prevod

studio-studio

A lanciare l'allarme
è

Na uzbunu poziva

Na uzbunu poziva

jedan studio

uno studio di

Nielsen Media.

jedno istraţivanje/jedna
studija

Nielsen Media.

(II god.)

Insegno da anni

Godinama predajem

Godinama predajem u

in un istituto tecnico

u jednom

jednoj tehničkoj školi

istituto-institut

kompanije „Nielsen Media―

tehničkom institutu
(III god.)
[...] alla fine
dell'anno

...ako neki student

...ako neki učenik

nije dobro prońao

nije dobro prońao...

se uno studente

iz nekog predmeta –

iz nekog predmeta –

non va bene in una

primjera radi iz

primjera radi iz

materia - per
esempio in
matematica- supera

matematike –
prelazi u

matematike – prelazi u

studente- student

l'anno con un
«debito».

naredni razred sa
jednim

naredni razred sa jednim
„dugovanjem―

„dugovanjem―
.(II god.)

Ovaj sluĦaj ilustruju i parovi poput: tecnico-tehničar, impianto-implant i sl.
7.1.4. Izmišljeni laţni parovi
O ovoj vrsti laņnih parova Ivir (115) kaņe sljedeĤe:
Prevodioci su ponekad spremni, pogotovu kada prevode na strani jezik kojim ne vladaju dosta
dobro stvoriti leksiĦki par u stranom jeziku po uzoru na rijeĦ svojega maternjeg jezika, u
punom uvjerenju (bez provjeravanja!) da ta rijeĦ doista postoji u tom stranom jeziku. U nekim
sluĦajevima to znaĦi stvaranje cijele rijeĦi, a u drugima samo pogreńno spajanje pojedinih
djelova rijeĦi – obiĦno sufiksa i prefiksa s osnovom.
Ova pojava se, meħutim, moņe sresti i u prevodima na maternji jezik.

data rijeĦ

nepostojeĤi oblik

prevod

collaboratore

kolaborator (II god.)

saradnik

irriverente

iriverentan (III god.)

drzak; neuĦtiv

carbone

karbon (III god.)

ugalj

355

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Za graħenje nepostojeĤih rijeĦi u prva dva od navedenih primjera najvjerovatnije je odgovorna analogija
nańeg imeniĦkog sufiksa -ator i pridjevskog sufiksa –entan sa italijasnkim sufiksima –tore i -ente koji imaju
zajedniĦko porijeklo u latinskom jeziku. Naime, sufiks–ator, kao i njegov italijanski „roħak― – tore, koriste se za
izvoħenje imenica sa znaĦenjem vrńioca radnje. Tako je, vjerovatno pod uticajem pravih parova poput:
comunicatore-komunikator, coordinatore-koordinator i sl. Nastao izmińljeni par: collaboratore-kolaborator.
SliĦno je i sa pridjevom irriverentan. Student ni ne dovodi u pitanje postojanje ovog pridjeva u svom maternjem
jeziku. On mu naprosto „dobro zvuĦi― buduĤi da sliĦni parovi veĤ postoje (irrilevante - irelevantan, latente latentan, trasparente-transparentan i sl.)
7.2. Greške usljed pogrešnog izbora znaĦenja rijeĦi u kontekstu
reĦenica
...i tecnici giapponesi hanno
ora cambiato strategia e smesso
di
irrorare i noccioli con acqua
di mare, per il timore che il sale
corroda gli impianti.

pogreńan prevod
...japanski tehničari su sada
promijenili strategiju i prestali da
kvase lješnike morskom vodom
iz
straha da Ĥe so nagristi biljke64
(III god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje
...japanski stručnjaci su sada
promijenili strategiju i prestali da
kvase jezgra [nuklearnih
postrojenja]
morskom vodom iz straha da Ĥe so
izazvati koroziju postrojenja.

Osim ńto ukazuju na neadekvatnu upotrebu rjeĦnika, ove greńke su pokazatelj nemara i povrńnosti kod
studenata, koji prevode izvorni tekst preskaĦuĤi i prvu i posljednju fazu prevodilaĦkog procesa tj. Ħitanje sa
razumijevanjem, odnosno provjeru gotovog prevoda. To potvrħuje Ħinjenica da ovakve prevode vrlo Ħesto
karakterińe odsustvo ikakvog smisla. Postavlja se pitanje kako prevaziĤi ovu vrstu greńaka. BuduĤi da se rad
studenata kod kuĤe ne moņe nadgledati, preostaje vrijeme provedeno na Ħasu tokom kojeg se oni moraju
„natjerati― da se u velikoj mjeri posvete analizi samog teksta i utvrħivanju problema, prije nego ńto poĦnu da
prevode.
7.3. Greške uzrokovane zamjenom hiperonima i hiponima
KarakteristiĦan primjer za ilustraciju ove vrste greńaka jeste italijanska imenica uomo, koja oznaĦava
ljudsku vrstu (čovjek), ali i njenog pripadnika muńkog pola (muškarac). SliĦno je i sa italijanskom imenicom:
bestia koja oznaĦava ņivotinjsku vrstu uopńte, a moņe da ima i uņe znaĦenje: stoka, dok se u sintagmi, Ħiji drugi
element biva Ħesto izostavljen: bestia (feroce), prevodi nańom imenicom: zvijer.
Navedena znaĦenja u studentskim prevodima Ħesto bivaju zamijenjena.
reĦenica
...E non soltanto gli uomini si
disinteressano di
questo spettacolo
ma anche le bestie.

pogreńan prevod
...Ne samo da se za ovaj dogaħaj
ne interesuju muškarci
veĤ ni zvijeri. (II god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje
...ne samo da se ljudi ne iteresuju
za ovaj dogaħaj, veĤ ni ţivotinje.

...Tu abbracciatelo bene, baciagli
l'orecchio che gli uomini perdono
la testa quando gli baci
l'orecchio...

...Ti ga snaņno zagrli, poljubi ga u
uho, jer ljudi gube glavu kad im
ljubiń uho. (III god.)

Ti ga snaņno zagrli, poljubi ga u
uho, jer muškarci gube glavu kad
im ljubiń uho.

7.4. Greške uzrokovane nepoznavanjem sintaktiĦkih i tvorbenih svojstava rijeĦi
reĦenica
In quel tempo ero innamorato
di mia di moglie: rotonda,
64

pogreńan prevod
Tada sam bio zaljubljen u svoju
ņenu:
okruglastu,
blijedu,

predloņeno rjeńenje
Tada sam bio zaljubljen u svoju ņenu onako
privlačnu bijele puti, rumenu i s oblinama

O ovoj vrsti greńaka vidi u poglavlju 7.6.

356

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
bianca e rosa,
appetitosa.
...per assistere alla levata del sole

rumenu,
halapljivu/dobrog
apetita (II god.)
...da bismo pomogli izlasku sunca
(II god.)

...da bismo prisustvovali izlasku sunca

U prvom primjeru voljena supruga umjesto epiteta: privlačna, poţeljna dobija epitet halapljiva, zato ńto
u osnovi izvedenog pridjeva student prepoznaje imenicu appetito (apetit), ne obraĤajuĤi paņnju na sufiks -oso
koji joj donosi novo, pridjevsko, znaĦenje. Ova greńka povlaĦi za sobom i greńku u odabiru prevoda za pridjev
rotonda. Naime, ako je veĤ „dobrog apetita―, onda je dama o kojoj se govori prirodno i okruglasta, buckasta,
debeljuškasta ili elegantno popunjena (II godina).
Drugi primjer ilustruje nerazlikovanje prelaznih i neprelaznih oblika pojedinih glagola, pa samim tim i
njihovih znaĦenja.
7.5. Greške uzrokovane prevoħenjem metodom rijeĦ za rijeĦ
Doslovni prevodi najĦeńĤi su uzrok greńaka na frazeolońkom nivou i na nivou stila, a vrlo Ħesto
naruńavaju i smisao prevoda.
reĦenica
Ho
messo
l'occhio
allo
spioncino...
...aveva alzato un po' troppo il
gomito. Per questo aveva dormito
sodo

netaĦan prevod
Stavila sam oko na ńpijunku...(III
god.)
...malo je previńe podigao lakat,
pa je zato tvrdo spavao. (II god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje
Pogledala sam kroz ńpijunku...
...malo je više popio, pa je zbog toga čvrsto
spavao.

7.6. LeksiĦke greške uzrokovane „unutarjeziĦkim― formalnim sliĦnostima izmeħu pojedinih rijeĦi
Ovakve greńke najvjerovatnije nastaju usljed sliĦnosti po zvuku izmeħu rijeĦi Ħije je znaĦenje student
ranije usvojio i neke druge rijeĦi iz nje izvedene ili jednostavno samo po obliku sa njom sliĦne, ali potpuno
drugaĦijeg znaĦenja.
reĦenica
...uno scrittore
che
ritiene
gli
uomini
discendenti dagli spiriti

netaĦan prevod
...
pisac
koji
zadrţava/drţi ljude...
(III god.)

predloņeno rjeńenje
...pisac koji smatra da su
ljudi
potekli
od
duhova...

uzrok greńke - sliĦnost:
ritenere – rattenere/detenere

U analiziranom korpusu naińli smo na veliki broj sliĦnih primjera: campus-campo, zotico-esotico,
sentiero-sentimento, complesso-complicazione, impianto-pianta itd.
7.7. Greške do kojih dolazi uslijed nepaţljivog Ħitanja teksta
Iako spadaju u omańke, ovakve nepaņnje Ħesto potpuno obesmisle prevod utiĦuĤi dalje na krajnji ishod
prevoħenja.
reĦenica

netaĦan prevod

taĦan prevod

uzrok greńke:

La regina era morta di
parto

Kraljica
djelimično
god.)

Kraljica je umrla na
poroĎaju

parto-parte

je
bila
mrtva (II

Po istom principu pramenovi kose Tine Tarner u jednom prevodu postaju „...sjajni i crni kao ugljenik―
(lucidi e neri come carbone/ carbonio) (III god.).
7.8. Greške uzrokovane pogrešnim odabirom registra u ciljnom tekstu
Ova vrsta greńke moņe da se javi na raznim nivoima u tekstu. Mijeńanje registara nije nińta manja
greńka od pogreńnog odabira registra na nivou teksta kao cjeline.
U ovom sluĦaju govorimo o leksiĦkim greńkama Ħiji uzrok leņi u pogreńnoj registarskoj obojenosti koja
nije u skladu sa pragmatiĦkom funkcijom izvornog niti ciljnog teksta.

357

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
reĦenica
C'era una volta un Re che aveva
una bimba. La regina era morta di
parto, e il Re aveva preso una
balia che gli allattasse la
piccina…
A Vittorio Emanuele le donne
belle, alte [...] erano sempre
piaciute.
Se
a
volte
―s‘infervorava‖ di piccole e
brutte...

netaĦan prevod
Bio jednom jedan kralj koji je
imao jednu kĤerku. Kraljica bjeńe
umrla na poroħaju, pa je kralj
morao da unajmi bebisiterku kako
bi mu čuvala dijete― (II god.)
Viktoru Emanuelu su se oduvijek
sviħale lijepe, visoke ņene. Ako
bi se ponekad „primao― na male i
ruņne...

predloņeno rjeńenje
Bio jednom jedan kralj koji je
imao jednu kĤerku. Kako je
kraljica umrla na poroħaju, kralj
je morao da uzme dojilju kako bi
dojila djevojĦicu.
Viktoru Emanuelu su se oduvijek
sviħale lijepe, visoke ņene. Ako
bi se ponekad „zagrijao― za neku
sitnu i ruņnu...

U prvom primjeru imenica bebisiterka, iako se u rjeĦniku nalazi pobrojana meħu sinonimima italijanske
imenice balia, suvińe je moderna da bi za nju mogla predstavljati dobro prevodno rjeńenje u bajci koja veĤ
prvom reĦenicom smijeńta radnju u davna vremena. Osim imenicom bebisiterka, balia je prevoħena i kao: ţena,
sluškinja, sluţavka, hraniteljka, dadilja, pa Ħak i babica, a ni u jednom od studentskih radova nije se nańla rijeĦ
dojilja, ńto je joń jedan od dokaza da studenti veoma Ħesto ne vode raĦuna o ńirem kontekstu i da ne sagledavaju
tekst u cjelini. Na konkretnom primjeru je oĦigledno kako jedna greńka za sobom povlaĦi i niz drugih. Izbor da
se balia prevede kao dadilja, ţena, sluţavka, bebisiterka uticao je i na pogreńan prevod glagola allattasse
(dojiti), koji je u ovim sluĦajevima preveden kao čuvati/brinuti se o/podizati/odgajati. Student koji se odluĦio da
balia prevede kao babica ostatak teksta prilagodio je „na svoju ruku― tom odabiru: „...a kralj je doveo babicu
koja je porodila djevojčicu―.
7.9. Greške uzrokovane prazninama u enciklopedijskom znanju
Znanje iz opńte kulture i obavijeńtenost igraju vaņnu ulogu u razumijevanju izvornog teksta, pa samim
tim i u prevodilaĦkom procesu. Praznine u tom tzv. enciklopedijskom znanju mogu da uzrokuju greńke na
razliĦitim nivoima teksta.
BuduĤi da je jezik jednog naroda nerazluĦiv od njegove kulture u najńirem smislu te rijeĦi, uĦeĤi jedan
jezik, uĦimo i o naĦinu ņivota i pogledu na svijet naroda koji se tim jezikom sluņi. U tom pogledu prevoħenje
nam pomaņe i u podizanju svijesti ne samo o jeziĦkim veĤ i o kulturnim sliĦnostima i razlikama izmeħu dva
razliĦita naroda.
Kao primjer za ovu vrstu greńke, posluņiĤe nam prevod jednog segmenta teksta koji govori o
amajlijama koje Italijani najĦeńĤe koriste protiv malera. Tu, naime, cornetti rossi (Ħuveni crveni roščići) postaju
crvene kifle, crveni konac, crvene potkovice, bijeli luk. U prvom sluĦaju nepoznavanje tog karakteristiĦnog
simbola, vezanog posebno za kulturu juņnog dijela Italije, uticalo je na to da se imenica cornetto ne prepozna
kao deminutiv imenice corno-rog, veĤ se, bez razmińljanja, uzima u svom drugom znaĦenju – kroasan, kifla.
Ostale varijante prevoda ukazuju na negativnu interferenciju kulture ciljnog jezika. Naime, crveni konac,
potkovica, pa i bijeli luk jesu znaĦenjski ekvivalenti crvenih roščića u nańoj kulturi, ali im nikako nije mjesto u
tekstu Ħija je osnovna namjera da nam pruņi informacije koje vezano za fenomen sujevjera karakterińu upravo
Italijane.
Ispravan prevod dobijen je samo u sedam od ukupno petnaest ispitnih tekstova.
8. ZakljuĦak
Cilj ovog rada bio je da se prikaņu leksiĦke greńke koje su uoĦene na korpusu prevoda studenata II i III
godine osnovnih studija na Odsjeku za italijanski jezik i knjiņevnost Filozofskog fakulteta Univerziteta Crne
Gore. Ovdje nijesmo govorili o tome koje su od navedenih greńaka karakteristiĦnije za niņi, a koje za vińi stepen
uĦenja italijanskog jezika na spomenutom univerzitetskom nivou. To ostavljamo za neku drugu priliku.
StatistiĦki obraħeni i uporeħeni rezultati, zajedno sa rezultatima analize greńaka na ostalim jeziĦkim
nivoima istog korpusa, pomoĤi Ĥe nam da utvrdimo kako teĦe proces usvajanja planom predviħenih jeziĦkih
znanja, i u kojoj mjeri su ostvareni glavni ciljevi vjeņbi prevoħenja. Na taj naĦin dobiĤemo smjernice koje Ĥe nas
uputiti u poboljńanje pojedinih segmenata nastavnog procesa.
Ono ńto je oĦigledno jeste da studentima treba bolja „obuka― u korińĤenju jednojeziĦnog rjeĦnika i
interneta prilikom prevoħenja. U tom smislu, treba insistirati na njihovom korińĤenju na samim vjeņbama.
Koliko god to vremena od Ħasa oduzimalo, profesor, kao koordinator procesa prevoħenja, ne bi trebalo da daje
rjeńenja prevodilaĦkih problema, veĤ da natjera studente da sami do njih doħu, eventualno uz pomoĤ njegovih
smjernica.

358

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Doprinos u savladavanju uzroka najfrekventnijih greńaka mogao bi da pruņi i potencijalni udņbenik za
prevoħenje65 koji bi sadrņao dodatak sa malim rjeĦnikom laņnih parova i sa napomenama o kontrastivnim
razlikama izmeħu dva jezika koje su se u rezultatima istraņivanja pojavile meħu ĦeńĤim uzroĦnicima greńaka na
razliĦitim nivoima.
Joń jedno veoma vaņno pitanje koje se nameĤe i o kome treba povesti raĦuna jeste usklaħenost
teorijskih predmeta i vjeņbi iz jezika, buduĤi da sam Ħin prevoħenja predstavlja spregu svih steĦenih jeziĦkih i
vanjeziĦkih znanja.

References
Calvi, M. V.(2003). La traduzione nell‘insegnamento delle lingue e nello studio dei linguaggi
specialistici.
http://www.ledonline.it/ledonline/tradurrespagnolo/tradurrespagnolo_02_calvi.pdf
Carreres, A. (2006). Strange bedfellows: Translation and Language teaching. The teaching of
translation into L2 in modern languages degrees; uses and limitations.
http://www.cttic.org/ACTI/
papers/Carreres.pdf
Di Sabato, B.(2007). La traduzione e l'apprendimento/insegnamento delle lingue.
http://www.glottodidattica.net/Articoli/articolo1_04.pdf
House, J.(2009). Translation, Oxford University Press
Ivir, V. (1984). Teorija i tehnika prevoĎenja. Novi Sad: Centar «KarlovaĦka gimnazija» Sremski
Karlovci zavod za izdavanje udņbenika.
LazareviĤ, R. (2009). ZnaĦaj upotrebe rjeĦnika u nastavi stranog jezika. U VuĦo, J, MilatoviĤ, B
(priredile), Individualizacija i diferencijacija u nastavi jezika i knjiţevnosti (str: 207-213). Univerzitet Crne
Gore, Filozofski fakultet NikńiĤ.
LazareviĤ, R., PiletiĤ, D. (2009). Predlog udņbenika za vjeņbe prevoħenja s italijanskog jezika na vińim
godinama studija. U VuĦo, J, MilatoviĤ, B. (priredile), Autonomija učenika i nastavnika u učenju i nastavi jezika
(str. 313-317). Univerzitet Crne Gore, Filozofski fakultet NikńiĤ
Little, D, Perclová, R. (2003) Evropski jezički portfolio namijenjen nastavnicima i mentorima.
Podgorica: Ministartvo prosvete i nauke
Pym, Anthony (1992). Translation Error Analysis and the Language Teaching, in: Cay Dollerup &amp;
Anne Loddegaard (priredile), The Teaching of Translation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 279-288
SamardņiĤ, M. (2008). Studentski prevod izmeħu ńkolskog i profesionalnog ocenjivanja. U VuĦo, J.
(priredila), Evaluacija u nastavi jezika i knjiţevnosti. Zbornik radova (str.133-145). Univerzitet Crne Gore,
Filozofski fakultet NikńiĤ.

65

O tome u LazareviĤ, R., PiletiĤ, D. (2009)

359

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21954">
                <text>52</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21955">
                <text>LeksiĦke greške u studentskim prevodima sa italijanskog jezika</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21956">
                <text>Piletić, Deja</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21957">
                <text>This paper deals with classification and explanation of the reasons of the most  frequent lexical errors which occur in the translations of the undergraduate students of the  Department of Italian Language and Literature (University of Montenegro). The corpus of  the research consists of the written translations from the Italian as a foreign language into  the Montenegrin as a mother tongue. The translations have been made in class, at home  and during the exams on the second and the third year of the mentioned courses of  undergraduate studies.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21958">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21959">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2825" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3596">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/1d677e89698ce1065512accfdd33c53e.pdf</src>
        <authentication>5af510bc33d9771329a4f037a8ecbc6a</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21953">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Communicative language teaching and socio-cultural competence:
An ongoing process
Elisabetta Pavan
Department of Linguistics and Comparative Cultural Studies
Ca‘ Foscari University of Venice, Italy
epavan@unive.it
Abstract: Communicative language teaching is undoubtfully the most widely
adopted teaching approach, however sometimes the learners turn out to be ‘fluent
fools‘, especially when the balance between language forms (accuracy/usage) and
language functions (fluency/use) are not linked to culture.
Culture should not be considered a fifth skill, neither something to be taught
deductively, reduced to a list of features to be learned. Culture is always in the
background, challenging our ability to make sense of the world around us, so the
teacher must raise students‘ awareness and develop a broad communicative
competence encompassing linguistic, sociolinguistic, discourse and strategic
competences, especially when he/she teaches a lingua franca such as English.
In this paper I will try to formulate a practical model offering some principles that
may prove useful for the development of skills and methods appropriate to a lingua
franca speaker, or rather, an intercultural speaker.
Thus becoming an intercultural speaker implies developing a solid basis of
intercultural awareness, and this implies a shift from description (usually linked to
cross-cultural studies), to modelling, in order to design a process of competence
building.
Descriptions cannot be taught, they can be memorized and are useful only when the
right situation appears, while models can be taught and competences, based on
models, can be developed and adapted to many different situations.
Key Words: intercultural education, pragmatics, language teaching methodology

Communicative Language Teaching and communicative competence
Communication is defined as an exchange of ideas and information between two or more
persons (Crystal 1992, Oxford Advanced Learner‘s Dictionary 1980). A communicative system consists
of at least three components: a medium, a sender, and a receiver. A message is shaped by the sender, it
may be verbal or nonverbal. It is then encoded into the nervous and muscular system. The message leaves
the sender and is transmitted via air (ear - spoken mode) or paper (eye - written mode) to the brain of the
receiver, where it is decoded and converted into concepts.
The communicative approach to language teaching refers to the principle of language as
communication. Communicative Language Teaching (CLT) dates back to the Seventies and can be
considered one of the current dominant methodologies, together with CLIL (Content and Language
Integrated Learning).
In the communicative approach the main purpose of teaching a foreign, or second language, is
communication. CLT desired outcome is for the learner to communicate successfully in real situations
using the target language, with conscious knowledge of the rules governing that language as a secondary
outcome.
The goal of language teaching is to develop, in learners, what Hymes (1964, 1972) termed
communicative competence, as opposed to Chomsky‘s (1965) theory of competence (linguistic
competence vs. performance).
Hymes (1972) explained what a speaker needs to know in order to be communicatively competent, and
assumed that a person who acquires communicative competence will have also acquired both knowledge
of and the ability to use the language of communication.
The notion of developing learners‘ ability to use language appropriately in sociocultural contexts
has been reformulated by later scholars such as Canale and Swain (1980) and van Ek (1986). Their
interpretations of communicative competence cover two aspects: linguistic competence and pragmatic
competence. Canale and Swain have identified four dimensions in communicative competence:
grammatical, sociolinguistic, discourse and strategic competences.
Grammatical competence refers to Chomsky‘s linguistic competence and to Hymes‘ possibility (formally
possible); it refers to language codes (grammar and lexis). Sociolinguistic competence refers to

413

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
knowledge and understanding of the social context in which communication takes place, the different
relations between and purposes of the actors. It deals with the socio-cultural use of language: a speaker
must know how to appropriately use words (vocabulary choice), register, style, in a given situation.
Discourse competence encompasses the way meaning is represented, hence how message elements are
interpreted and inferred, in the context of the entire discourse or text. Strategic competence implies
knowledge of verbal and nonverbal communication strategies, as well as the strategies used to initiate,
terminate, maintain and repair a communication. Grammatical competence refers to accuracy and usage,
while sociolinguistic competence to fluency and use.
According to the Council of Europe (COE 2001), communicative language competence can be
considered as comprising several areas: linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic. Each of these
components is postulated as comprising, in particular, knowledge and skills and know-how.
Hymes (1972) stated that competent speakers should not only be able to generate appropriate sentences
but also should be aware that sociolinguistic rules must be included in the analysis of a language, arguing
that language study cannot be restricted to discussion of linguistics rules.
A speech act refers to the performance of a certain act through words. Olshtain and Cohen (1983) defined
sociolinguistic competence as ―the speakers‘ ability to determine the pragmatic appropriateness of a
particular speech act in a given context. At the production level it involves the selection of one of several
grammatically acceptable forms according to the formality of the situation and to the number of available
forms‖.
Crystal (1985) affirmed that pragmatics is the study of language from the point of view of users,
in particular, of the choices they make, of the constraints they encounter in using language in social
interaction and of the effects their use of language has on other participants in the act of communication.
Pragmatics is the study of communicative action in its sociocultural context; it includes not only speech
acts such as requesting, greeting, and so on, but also participation in conversation, engaging in different
types of discourse, and maintaining interaction in complex speech events.
Learners of a second language have to learn the conventionalized forms in the new language, as
well as specificities of interactional styles.

Intercultural communicative competence
Intercultural communicative competence widens the concept of communicative competence to
include intercultural competence.
Appropriateness and effectiveness of communicative actions and of speech acts such as politeness
strategies, requesting, greetings, apologizing, are culturally bound. In a foreign language not only does the
linguistic realization of the same speech act differ in terms of lexical choices, the intention and the force
of the act are different as well. For example, in Italian culture, accepting an offer immediately may be
considered impolite, so it is better to refuse at least twice before accepting and, depending on the
situation, the refusal may be strong in terms of vehemence.
Intercultural competence is the term used to describe the ability to work across cultures with an
understanding of cultures on a general level, it includes communication and knowledge of the world.
Language teaching and learning involves the knowledge of a new language and in some cases of
new contents related to a subject (such as in CLIL methodology).
Students must be offered a new frame of reference in terms of culture specific and culture
general knowledge and of insights into the way in which culture affects language and communication.
The idea of offering foreign language students a structured world-view is not new; it can be traced back to
the 17th Century, to Comenius‘ Orbis Pictus. However any representation of the target culture must be
carefully constructed: sometimes folkloristic stereotypes may correspond to the traditional way a people
see themselves and they can be used, but in order to develop sociocultural knowledge and intercultural
skills it is much more productive to consider a model with three components, which Balboni (2006)
identified as:

•
•
•

software of the mind
communication software

context software
Software of the mind refers to the cultural factors which affect communication during the exchange of
messages between two or more people who are pursuing specific goals through communicating with
others. This software works like the software in a computer: the user is unaware of it until a warning
message appears on the screen. This software is our cultural values.

414

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Communication software refers to the verbal and nonverbal codes in use. The communicator‘s attention
is mainly focused on verbal acts, and little or no consideration is given to non-verbal communication,
which, in many cases, is (wrongly) thought to be universal.
Context software is the socio-pragmatic software which governs the beginning, the direction, and the
conclusion of a communicative event (whether monocultural or intercultural).
Pragmatic competences are concerned with the functional use of linguistic resources in scenarios
or scripts of interactional exchanges and it is very important to stress the major impact of interactions and
cultural environments in which such abilities are constructed.
Sociolinguistic competences refer to the sociocultural conditions of language use. Highly
sensitive to social conventions, the sociolinguistic component strongly affects all language
communication between representatives of different cultures, even though participants may often be
unaware of its influence.
When two strangers lightly bump into each other, if they are British and Mediterranean people they may
evaluate this bump similarly in terms of degrees of seriousness, and as a result they may not have similar
conceptions as to whether a verbal apology is required.
Richards &amp; Sukwiwatt (1983) referred to a situation in which a Japanese learner (JE) has to express
gratitude in English to a native speaker (E) may go as follows:
E. Look what I‘ve got for you (maybe a gift)
JE: Oh! I‘m sorry (thank you does not sound sincere enough in Japanese)
E: Why sorry?
Indeed Italians often add: ―We must have lunch /a coffee together sometime‖ to their repertoire of leavetaking formulae, which in English are: See you, Take care, Goodbye, and other formal or informal
phrases, depending on the situations. But what Italians add is not meant to be a suggestion, it is a formula,
and the foreign interlocutor may be puzzled, waiting for an invitation that doesn‘t come. To an offer in
English, Italians may answer: ―Yes, thank you‖ instead of ―Yes, please‖ if they don‘t master the offers,
refusals and requests speech acts.

Intercultural awareness
Learners of a second language have to learn the conventionalized forms in the new language, as
well as peculiarities of interactional styles. The Council of Europe (2001) has stated that the need for
communication presupposes a ‗communication gap‘, which can however be bridged because of the
overlap, or partial congruence, between the mental context of the user in focus and the mental context of
the interlocutor(s). The effect – and often all or part of the function – of a communicative act is to
increase the area of congruence in the understanding of the situation in the interests of effective
communication so as to serve the purposes of the participants. Differences in values and beliefs,
politeness conventions, social expectations, etc. in terms of which the parties interpret the interaction are
more difficult to bridge, unless the latter have acquired the necessary intercultural awareness.
In Gass and Neu (1995:2) the following incident is reported:
One morning, Mrs. G, a native speaker of English now living in Israel, was doing her daily
shopping at the local supermarket. As she was pushing her shopping cart she unintentionally
bumped into Mr. Y, a native Israeli. Her natural reaction was to say ―I am sorry‖ (in Hebrew). Mr.
Y turned to her and said ―Lady, you could at least apologise.‖ On another occasion the very same
Mr. Y. arrived late for a meeting conducted by Mr. W (a native speaker of English) in English. As
he walked into the room he said, ―The bus was late‖, and sat down. Mr. W, obviously annoyed,
muttered to himself, ―These Israelis, why don‘t they ever apologise!‖ (Olshtain and Cohen, 1989).
What the incident tells us is that saying ‗I‘m sorry‘ in Hebrew is considered not strong enough by the
native Israeli; on the other hand the native speaker of English cannot decode the words Mr. Y. utters as an
apology.
In the Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning, Teaching, Assessment
(CEFR) (COE 2001) cultural awareness is defined as:
Knowledge, awareness and understanding of the relation (similarities and distinctive differences)
between the ‗world of origin‘ and the ‗world of the target community‘ produce an intercultural
awareness. It is, of course, important to note that intercultural awareness includes an awareness of
regional and social diversity in both worlds. It is also enriched by awareness of a wider range of

415

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
cultures than those carried by the learner‘s L1 and L2. This wider awareness helps to place both of
these in context. In addition to objective knowledge, intercultural awareness covers an awareness
of how each community appears from the perspective of the other, often in the form of national
stereotypes.
The intercultural dimension of language education and intercultural competence has been widely
researched by Byram and Flemming (1998), Byram (1997), and Byram and Zarate (1997).

Communicating in a lingua franca and the intercultural speaker
The use of English, or another language, as a lingua franca and the growing awareness that
while it might resolve a specific communication problem between people, could not provide a basis for
real communication.
It is a useful shortcut and may help; nonetheless, according to Crystal (1997) language has no
independent existence, it lives in some sort of mystical space apart from the people who speak it. It exists
in the brains, mouths, ears, hands and eyes of its users, and when they succeed on the international stage,
their language succeeds, and when they fail, their language fails.
When two people conversing are from different countries, speaking in a language which is a
foreign or a second language for one of them, or which is foreign to both of them, they may still be highly
aware of their national identities. This awareness leads to feeling the other is different and such a situation
may influence what they say and how they say it, because they see the other person as a representative of
a country, or a nation. This focus on national identity, and the accompanying risk of relying on
stereotypes, reduces the individual from a complex human being to someone who is seen as
representative of a country or ‗culture‘.
Regardless of the language, individuals must thus be sensitized to what underlies communication: the fact
is that using a lingua franca is not always a suitable or successful solution to all problems. They must
learn to cope with the complexities of intercultural communication, where grammatical or lexical
correctness, important though they are, may not be the decisive factor in communicative success. Neither
may a satisfactory control of language functions be enough (Jackobson 1963; Halliday 1973), however
essential it may be. Even a basic generalized knowledge of the foreign language‘s culture may not be a
guarantee of success, as it may lead to or enhance existing stereotypes (Steele and Suozzo 1994).
Kramsch (1998).
According to Byram (2001) linguistic and grammatical competence are part of the process of
teaching a foreign language, nonetheless a reflection on the nature of interaction between native speakers
of a language and foreign speakers of that language, or between foreign speakers of a language which is
serving them as a lingua franca, has led to the recognition that it is neither appropriate nor desirable for
learners to model themselves on native speakers with respect to the learning about and understanding
another culture.
The term intercultural is normative and carries values, as opposed to cross-cultural which is
considered neutral, a mere description of elements that may vary in different cultures. Interculturality has
moral and ethical dimensions for it incorporates respect for what is different and underlies a contact, a
change, in both the sender and the receiver, which, after the encounter, will be an irremediable change
(Pavan 2009).
Being an intercultural speaker implies being able to engage with complexity and multiple
identities, and so avoiding the stereotyping which accompanies perceiving someone through a single
identity. It is based on perceiving the interlocutor as an individual whose qualities are to be discovered,
rather than as a representative of an externally attributed identity. According to Kramsch (1998) this
implies a language learner who acts as a mediator between two cultures, interprets and understands other
perspectives, as well as questions what is taken for granted in his/her own society.
Byram (2001) affirms that the intercultural speaker is:
―someone who has an ability to interact with ‗others‘, to accept other perspectives and
perceptions of the world, to mediate between different perspectives to be conscious of
their evaluations of difference (Byram and Zarate, 1997; see also Kramsch, 1998). Where
the otherness which learners meet is that of a society with a different language, they
clearly need both linguistic competence and intercultural competence‖.
He adds that intercultural competence is necessary whether a different language is present or not.

416

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
From description to modelling
Being an intercultural speaker implies developing a solid intercultural awareness, and the
practice described above indicates a shift from description to modelling, in order to design a process of
competence building.
Descriptions cannot be taught, they can be memorized and are useful only when the right situation
appears, while models can be taught and competences, based on models, can be developed and adapted to
many different situations (Balboni 2007).
Balboni states that a model is a generative framework, i. e. a pattern or a structure which can
include all possible occurrences, it is able to generate behaviour and it is often internally structured in a
hierarchical manner. He also states that the higher the level of a model, the greater its complexity, which
does not necessarily lead to complexity in extensio, but rather in profundis, exactly like a website
homepage. and finally he affirms that models are forms of declarative knowledge which must generate
procedural knowledge. A model becomes a competence when it is able to generate behaviour, this occurs
when the model is applied to a context of performance. Competence cannot be taught, but must be
constructed, filling in the elements of the model with the information, declarations and procedures to be
used in the performance phase. Balboni concludes that, since intercultural communication competence is
a competence, it cannot be taught, nonetheless once a reliable model of it has been provided, it can be
built up.
Respect for cultural models is central to developing cultural awareness, a knowledge sometimes taken for
granted. However it is often difficult to understand one‘s own models because we tend to assume our
behaviour is natural and do not realise it is conditioned by our culture(s).
Balboni‘s (2007) explanation leads to performance, and to intercultural awareness, which is the
foundation of communication and involves the ability to stand back from ourselves and become aware of
our cultural values, beliefs and perceptions, crucial knowledge we must have when interacting with
people from other cultures.
As the Council of Europe (2001) states, intercultural awareness is the knowledge, awareness and
understanding of the relation (similarities and distinctive differences) between the ‗world of origin‘ and
the ‗world of the target community.‘
The model of intercultural communication competence proposed in Balboni (2007) has already
been described above, these are the three components that are crucial to a model of intercultural
communication competence.
Adopting Hofstede‘s (1991) metaphor, they are:
 software of the mind, which refers to the cultural factors which affect communication;
 communication software, which refers to the codes used, both verbal and nonverbal;
 context software, which refers to the socio-pragmatic software that governs the beginning, the
course and the conclusion of an interaction, of a communicative event as described by Hymes
(1972).
The first two elements, cultural and communicative, constitute the competence, the ability to do
something, while the third, the ‗context software‘ makes it possible to move from competence to
performance, the setting where ‗real‘ communication occurs.

Conclusion
In a world of change, where people are more and more mobile, where travel and communication
are available at low prices to increasing numbers of travellers, the marketplace is global and the presence
of non-native (foreign) students is a solid reality in the classroom, foreign language education must
become intercultural.
Foreign language education is, by definition, intercultural, since introducing a foreign language in a
classroom implies connecting the students to a new world. Furthermore the primary goal of foreign
language education should be real-life communication and the developing of critical-thinking skills in a
variety of situations.
Thus the challenge is that of promoting the teaching of foreign languages and the acquisition of
intercultural competencies within a framework where the issue should be, as far as possible, learning by
doing.
If valid communication and co-operation are to exist, language teaching should also contribute to an
active, critical understanding of each person‘s own culture and of the others‘ cultures too.

417

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
References
Balboni, P.E. (2007). La comunicazione Interculturale. Venezia: Marsilio.
Byram, M. (1997). Teaching and Assessing Intercultural Communicative Competence. Clevedon:
Multilingual Matters.
Byram, M. (2001). ―Introduction‖. In Byram et al. (Eds.), Developing Intercultural Competence in
Practice. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters. 1-8.
Byram, M. &amp; Fleming, M. (Eds.). (1998). Language Learning in Intercultural Perspective: Approaches
through Drama and Ethnography. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Byram, M. &amp; Zarate, G. (Eds.). (1997). The Sociocultural and Intercultural Dimension of Language
Learning and Teaching. Strasbourg: Council of Europe.
Canale, M. &amp; Swain, M. (1980). The theoretical bases of communicative approaches to second language
teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics 1 (1), 1-47.
Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the Theory of Syntax. Boston: MIT Press.
Cohen, A. D. &amp; Olshtain, E. (1981). Developing a measure of socio-cultural competence: The case of
apology. Language Learning, 31(1), 113-134.
Council of Europe. (2001). Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning,
Teaching, Assessment. Strasbourg: Council of Europe.
Crystal, D. (1985). A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics, 2nd edition. Oxford: Blackwell.
Crystal, D. (1992). An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of Language and Languages. Oxford: Blackwell
Publishers.
Crystal, D. (1997). English as a Global Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Gass, S.M. &amp; Neu, J. (Eds.). (1995). Speech Acts across Cultures: Challenges to communication in a
Second Language. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Halliday, M. 1973. Explorations in the functions of language. London: Edward Arnold.
Hofstede, G. (1991). Cultures and organizations: Software of the mind. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Hymes D. (1972). On communicative competence, in Pride J.B. &amp; J. Holmes (Eds.), Sociolinguistics:
Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 269-293.
Hymes, Dell (Ed.). (1964). Language in culture and society. New York: Harper and Row.
Jackobson, R. (1963). Essais de linguistique générale. Paris: Editions de Minuit.
Kramsch, K. (1998). The privilege of the intercultural speaker. In M. Byram &amp; M. Fleming (Eds.),
Language learning in intercultural perspective: approaches through drama and ethnography.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 16–31.
Newmark, L. (1966). How not to interfere with language Teaching. In C.J. Brumfit &amp; K. Johnson (Eds.),
The Communicative Approach to Language Teaching, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Olshtain, E. &amp; Cohen, A. D. (1983). Apology: A speech act set. In N. Wolfson &amp; E. Judd (Eds.),
Sociolinguistics and language acquisition. Rowley: Newbury House, 18-35.
Oxford Advanced Learner‘s Dictionary (1980). Oxford: Oxford University Press.

418

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Pavan, E. (2009). Communicating in the Mediterranean Area: a Matter of Cultural Awareness.
International Journal of Euro-Mediterranean Studies, 2, (1), 121-139
Richards, J. C. &amp; Sukwiwat, M. (1983). Language Transfer and Conversational Competence. Applied
Linguistics 4 (2). 113-125.
Steele R. &amp; Suozzo A. (1994). Teaching French culture: Theory and practice. Lincolnwood: National
Textbook.
van Ek, J. A. (1986). Objectives for foreign language learning. (Vol. 1): Scope. Strasbourg: Council of
Europe.

419

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21947">
                <text>61</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21948">
                <text>Communicative language teaching and socio-cultural competence:  An ongoing process</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21949">
                <text>Pavan, Elisabetta</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21950">
                <text>Communicative language teaching is undoubtfully the most widely  adopted teaching approach, however sometimes the learners turn out to be ‘fluent  fools‘, especially when the balance between language forms (accuracy/usage) and  language functions (fluency/use) are not linked to culture.  Culture should not be considered a fifth skill, neither something to be taught  deductively, reduced to a list of features to be learned. Culture is always in the  background, challenging our ability to make sense of the world around us, so the  teacher must raise students‘ awareness and develop a broad communicative  competence encompassing linguistic, sociolinguistic, discourse and strategic  competences, especially when he/she teaches a lingua franca such as English.  In this paper I will try to formulate a practical model offering some principles that  may prove useful for the development of skills and methods appropriate to a lingua  franca speaker, or rather, an intercultural speaker.  Thus becoming an intercultural speaker implies developing a solid basis of  intercultural awareness, and this implies a shift from description (usually linked to  cross-cultural studies), to modelling, in order to design a process of competence  building.  Descriptions cannot be taught, they can be memorized and are useful only when the  right situation appears, while models can be taught and competences, based on  models, can be developed and adapted to many different situations.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21951">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21952">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2824" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3595">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/77ed4800380fcd1890989eb81598b342.pdf</src>
        <authentication>967da2fc7262e9996e4ee1499a51dbcc</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21946">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

Raising Language Learners‘ Pragmatic Awareness and Intercultural
Competence
in Increasingly Multilingual Environments
Michał B. Paradowski
Institute of Applied Linguistics,
University of Warsaw
m.b.paradowski@uw.edu.pl
Abstract: Pragmatic fluency forms crucial part of a language user‘s competence. Norms
of politeness, communicative styles, scripts and preferences differ between languages and
cultures in describable ways, FL realizations of pragmatic functions are often unclear to
the learner where the relevant contextual factors are not self-evident, or are ignored when
they inconceivably grossly differ from the L1 phenomena. Even positive L1 transfer is not
activated if the learner has not been trained, whereas handling pragmatic and discourse
features of the TL in the classroom is conducive to increased operationality in the use
thereof.
A promising perspective for successful intercultural and pragmatic training is the
Interface Model, which proceeds from an explication of how relevant principles operate
in the learners‘ L1 (culture) through an explanation of pertinent L2 norms and subsequent
modification of the L1 principle to accommodate L2 data, to practice first expecting the
learner to apply the appropriate FL strategies and speech acts against an L1 (!) context. By
such a gradual, multi-stage method the learner becomes ‗pragmatically fluent‘ before
commencing to use the operational principles in the TL itself. The juxtaposition and use
of L1 and L2 principles alongside lead to successful automatization and internalization of
the material and the development of pragmatic multicompetence – L2 users differ
significantly in their employment of pragmalinguistic strategies from monolingual
speakers of either language, transferring similar speech acts back and forth between the
tongues in their command. The Interface Model enables them to transfer those patterns of
interactional behavior which will be appropriate.
Key Words: pragmatic fluency, interface model, explication, awareness-raising,
pragmatic transfer
Like nature, the L1 creeps back in, however many times you throw it out with a pitch fork.
(Cook, 2001: 405)

Introduction
It is an empirically supported psychological fact that learning invariably progresses by relating new
information to the already familiar, relying on existing knowledge to facilitate new learning (e.g. Kielhôfer, 1994;
that is why we learn in terms of prototypes, and that is why the uptake and use of linguistic features are highly
correlated with their input frequencies; N. Ellis, 2010; see also Bowerman, 2008; Kittredge &amp; Dell, 2008; Taylor,
2008); the inherent comparative expectations evident in the very question ―What does it look like?‖ From very early
on, our brain organises our experienced and incoming information into categories (Vosniadou, 2008); the more
narrow and restricted the cataloguing, the more effectual it seems to be (since broader categories make it easier to
overshoot the mark; Bowerman, 2005). Meaning is constructed when the brain perceives relationships, relevant or
consequential connections motivating it to focus and activate prior knowledge (Caine &amp; Caine, 1994: 4). The very
essence of learning lies not just in taking in new knowledge, but in integrating it with the already known knowledge
structures, and subsequently—with time—extending it to new situations, refining its range of application, and
employing it in appropriate ways. Constructing meaning involves the cognitive skills of:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

focusing;
predicting;
inferring connections;
organizing information;
generalizing;
analyzing;
sorting relevant and irrelevant information;
evaluating; and
labeling. (Jackson, 2002: 4)

910

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Even a cursory analysis of the nature of these skills and strategies will reveal that crucial to all is the ability
to draw upon prior knowledge. This general truth has been incorporated in Chapter 5.1 of the Common European
Framework of Reference for Languages under the label of savoir apprendre—the ability to learn, knowledge how to
learn effectively—which is recognized as part of the general (i.e. not limited to the linguistic domain only)
competences of a language learner/user:
In its most general sense, savoir-apprendre is the ability to observe and participate in new experiences and to
incorporate new knowledge into existing knowledge, modifying the latter where necessary. (CoE, 2001: 106)

This transfer of general skills is, of course, no CEF discovery. As we will learn from Coe et al. (1983), for
instance, in late 1970s and early 1980s skills and strategies used when performing a listening, speaking, reading or
writing activity were frequently taught through specific materials, where the students were encouraged to recognize
that they already possessed skills in their L1 which they could transfer into the TL (Keddle, 2004: 45). By the same
token, learners who are already bi-/multilingual are more aware of the learning and communication strategies which
they had developed over time, and are able to apply these to yet another language.

The familiar in FLL
We dissect nature along lines laid down by our native language…
Language is not simply a reporting device for experience but a defining framework for it.
(Benjamin Lee Whorf, 1936; cf. also 1940/56: 212)

Thus, new knowledge is internalised by integrating it with the already available. The familiarity is equally
vital in the process of foreign language learning (FLL). Here the familiar is, of course, the students‘ mother tongue,
which is why—whether they are ordered or forbidden—they will inevitably try to explain a new L2 item to
themselves and make sense of it in NL terms and comparing it with their L1, making a conscious (even if
unarticulated) link to the L1, as well as fall back on translation (especially at the earlier stages of proficiency). The L2
is always mediated by the L1, a base language which the learner strives to transform, rearticulate, reformulate
(Filatova, 2010), and a clear vestige of concepts from the L1 remains even in advanced L2 users (Verspoor, 2008;
Lowie, Verspoor &amp; Seton, 2010). FL learners invariably attempt to incorporate the new language in the framework
of the known one; they seek a safe passage from the TL to their mother tongue. These attempts are instinctive and
made irrespective of the classroom methodology employed; learners compare languages with or without being
instructed to do so, as proven by experiments from various disciplines (cf. e.g. Williams &amp; Hammarberg, 1998;
Franceschini et al. 2003; de Bot, 2004). Drawing on the learner‘s L1 (or another mastered tongue) and showing
comparisons and contrasts between the languages mirrors, facilitates and accelerates the processes which occur
independently in his/her mind. If our learners had no benefit of having been raised in a multilingual environment, the
teacher should be obliged to make them at least partially conscious of their L 1 competence through metalinguistic
awareness-raising. The role of pedagogic intervention is unquestionable, as transfer of operations from the L1 to the
FL usually requires correction and clarification (cf. A. A. Leontiev, 1981):
the transition [from operations in the mother tongue to these used in the foreign tongue] is not automatic, and the learner
will not immediately or without effort come up with the foreign equivalent to the utterance in the mother tongue,
remember the rules, and successively apply them. (op. cit.: 27)

Yet, paradoxically, where most teachers are more than content when their students display the ability to
transfer skills or extend strategies taught to new contexts, this has seemed not to concern language instructors, with
late 20th-century ELT methodology discouraging the use of the L1 in the classroom.
The overwhelming majority of language course books and grammar reference materials on the market (with
a few notable exceptions where contrastive grammar boxes are present) provide English-language explanations and
totally ignore the relations holding between the students‘ L1 and the TL. Such mainly Euro- or Amerocentric books
moulded in the generic approach are, using James‘ (1980: 24) term, ―universally valid [but] for purely commercial
reasons.‖ Many students—and teachers as well—are not fully aware of the common properties of the TL and their
L1, which could be beneficially put to use in the teaching and learning process. A truly pedagogical grammar should
be contrastive (especially with linguistically homogeneous FL groups in mind). This entails that competence in the
FL should be built by exploiting the common ground. As Singleton (2005) observed, even with the Audiolingual
Method, where no occasions were provided for making semantic-associative links between L2 and L1 words, such
links were undoubtedly forged anyway. This links with the observation made by Wolff (2005) that learners can only
comprehend items which they can assimilate with the knowledge structures already available.

Noticing
Having mentioned the role of conscious processes in the internalisation of a FL one cannot but revert to the
notion of noticing. In a detailed diary study of Robert Schmidt‘s (1990) 22-week stay in Brazil and his acquisition of
911

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Brazilian Portuguese over that period, the author reported his conviction that he usually noticed—and subsequently
began to acquire—forms in out-of-class input only after they had been taught. Schmidt and Frota (1986) substantiate
the hypothesis that in order to acquire communicative aspects of linguistic competence, the learner‘s attention must
first be directed to them, causing noticing. Their (1986: 310) ―notice the gap‖ premise posits two kinds of noticing
that are necessary for uptake of novel linguistic forms to occur:
1.
2.

in order for the input to become intake, learners must attend to the linguistic forms and features therein; 303
in order to make progress, learners must notice the ―gap‖ between their output (their developing IL) and the
input (the TL system; op. cit.: 311; Swain &amp; Lapkin, 1995: 388); what has also been called ―matching‖
(Klein, 1986: 62) or ―cognitive comparison‖ (Ellis, 1995: 90).304

Rephrased by Lewis (1993: 154), the ―process of acquisition is best aided by making students aware of
features of the target language, and, in due course, of how their production of the target language differs from its
norms.‖ This important point gains validation from Sajavaara‘s (1981: 115) remark that at the onset of SLA, the
learner‘s perceptual (―cue detection‖) mechanisms are tuned to the phenomena and processes available in his/her L 1,
and not to picking up relevant TL features! Thus, the learner will tend to hear the TL utterances in terms of
categories and structures of his/her NL, and substitute its elements for the target ones.305 This belief was reiterated by
White‘s (2000: 137) assertion that the L1 functioning as an active filter may prevent aspects of L2 input from being
noticed (and hence lead to fossilisation) – thus presenting an L1-mediated UG access perspective which, under this
view, is practically tantamount to ―no access‖306 (Romuald Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, p.c., 2007, Feb. 19).
Noticing requires the allocation of focal attention and rehearsal in short-term memory (Robinson, 1997:
225); hence, detection alone without conscious registration is not conducive to learning (Schmidt, 1993; 1994: 17).
Language tasks designed with the aim of promoting noticing should make the learner devote some attention to form,
and facilitate comparisons between IL output and TL models. Reformulation, where students‘ flawed performance is
weighed against a well-formed exemplar and where they obtain the chance to draw conclusions and learn from the
comparison is very suitable here (Piechurska-Kuciel, 1999: 18). The dictogloss, where the learners reconstruct a
previously heard (or read) text is another useful task, as it helps them attend to and recognise linguistic problems
(Swain &amp; Lapkin, 1995: 373).
Conscious attention also plays a role in the acquisition of TL pragmatics. Arguing that a connectionist
framework is a suitable representation for such noncategorical knowledge Schmidt (1993) makes the case that
conscious attention (explicit learning) is necessary to establish connections and acquire pragmatic competence in the
L2, with mere exposure to pragmatically significant experience inconducive to learning. Thus, the learner should not
only have a knowledge of the linguistic resources available for realising particular communicative intentions and
pragmatic effects, but also knowledge of their appropriate socio-contextual use.

Concentrating on foreign language learning
All the aforementioned factors are particularly consequential in FL learning, where the environment differs
substantially from that in SLA, rendering direct evidence inevitable. Firstly, with a limited attention span, learners
happen not to pay too much heed to what is going on in the classroom, and even if they do, they focus on the
303

This is why Ellis (1989: 305) uses the term ―explicit instruction‖ interchangeably with ―external manipulation of the input‖.
Widdowson (1978: 13; 1979) distinguished two kinds of rules: reference rules, in absentio, knowledge of the FL (imposed by
the teacher) to which reference can be made when required, constituting the learner‘s linguistic competence, and expression rules,
in presentio, assumed by the learner to be the norm in a given situation, which determines what the learner actually does with the
language and allows him/her to generate linguistic behaviour meeting the communicative needs even without sufficient linguistic
competence (Krzeszowski, 1977/81: 75). Consequently, with a constant deficit of reference rules, ―a learner‘s errors are evidence
of success and not of failure [because it is] the consequence of success in developing context rules‖ (i.e., IL; Widdowson, 1979:
190).
305
A similar hypothesis is now being entertained in explaining the difficulty of acquiring native-like pronunciation: it is
conceivable that once the child becomes accustomed to a certain range of phonemes, his/her ―mental phonetic perception grid‖
becomes filled, not allowing new forms to enter and seeking their closest retrievable equivalent for substitution.
306
Since resorting to L1 mechanisms is less costly than preserving and accessing UG once the mother tongue has been
established, and in most cases it is practically impossible to determine which of the two is at play during SLA (Romuald
Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, p.c., 2007, Feb. 19).
304

912

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
propositional content of the utterance rather than form (VanPatten‘s Primacy of Meaning Principle; 2004: 18) and
fail to retain the structure. This is our universal propensity: we listen to language predominantly to understand the
message, paying little attention to the precise wording; in Wilberg‘s (1987) words, ―we eat the sweet but discard the
wrapper.‖
Secondly, while in an immersion situation learners have ample opportunity and occasions for out-of-school
interaction with NSs and repeated and varied exposure to a very robust linguistic environment and will, hopefully,
ultimately absorb a lot (which is why Krashen dubs natural settings ―acquisition-rich environments‖), this is not
readily available in the conventional classroom (educational settings constituting an ―acquisition-poor
environment‖), not least because the time factor does not allow sufficient exposure.
And, thirdly, indirect linguistic evidence need not necessarily be 100% well-formed.
There is one more reason why I concentrate on language learning. The critical/sensitive period hypothesis
claims that after puberty a language cannot be acquired naturally. At the same time, adolescent and adult learners are
already holders of a ―driving licence‖307 in one language—their NL—and will have some assumptions and
expectations concerning the highway code of the TL (Łukasiewicz, 2006: 8). If we agree with Schachter that
Universal Grammar only controls core linguistic competence and that the bulk of language data, ―up to two thirds of
the contents of the pedagogical grammar‖ cannot fall within its scope (1996: 72), it follows that the overwhelming
peripheral idiosyncrasy of language—whether in L1A, SLA, or FLL—simply has to be swotted anyway, irrespective
of the age of the learner.
After prolonged debate, recent research has positively settled that while teaching should not be limited to
formal instruction, formal instruction should not be excluded from the language syllabus either.
Without full access to UG and prolonged access to indirect positive evidence, the grammatical system of a
FL will never be internalised without the compensatory remedy of formal instruction, a ―catalyser‖ in the words of
Maria Dakowska (p.c., March 12 2007).

The Language Interface Model
―Well,‖ said Owl, ―the customary procedure in such cases is as follows.‖
―What does Crustimoney Proseedcake mean?‖ said Pooh.
―For I am a Bear of Very Little Brain, and long words Bother me.‖
―It means the Thing to Do.‖
―As long as it means that, I don‘t mind,‖ said Pooh humbly.
—Alan Alexander Milne Winnie-the-Pooh (1926: Ch. 4: In Which Eeyore Loses A Tail and Pooh Finds One)

This is not, however, the end of the story. The basic reason why we look for familiar orientation points and
similarities when in a new situation is our natural need for safety. We feel more comfortable and at ease at home, in
our district and city, than at a new venue, even though the latter may be objectively better-appointed, more attractive
and safer, just because in the former we could take more things for granted that would bother us elsewhere. This is
also why the target language should literally be taught in the framework of the learner‘s L1 – as in the Language
Interface Model (Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, 2003a), which proves appreciably more successful than other approaches,
with the results and enhanced retention preserved long after the instruction period has ended. The method bases on
the model of pedagogical grammar charted in Gozdawa-Gołębiowski (op. cit.: 201–9; 2003b), with a couple of
minor modifications and expansions on my part.
What is so new here? The model builds upon the long-known Contrastive Analysis, but in a novel, eclectic
fashion, by forging an interface between the learner‘s L1 and the TL, supplemented with an explication of the
underlying grammatical system, thus leading to an enhanced understanding of the ―how‘s‖ and ―why‘s‖ of the
material to be mastered. But let us first delineate the modus procedendi step by step:
1. The method usually commences by initial exposure (Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, 2003a: 196ff; 2003b: passim;
James, 1994: 210; 1998: 261) of new language material in a natural context, accompanied by its direct
translational equivalent, but without aiming at structural decomposition. Preferably—for the learner to pay

307

This knowledge of language, including some awareness of deep structure phenomena, may be called—extending Rusiecki‘s
(1980) term beyond the realm of vocabulary—latent bilingualism. The learning difficulty would then be seen as lying in
discovering the idiosyncratic rules whereby the L2 relates DS to SS and the phonetic representations (Zybert, 1999: 24).

913

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
attention to the relevant grammatical information given the limited capacity to process information—the context
should be a short sentence, as such are easier to process than discourse (Wong, 2004: 38–42);
2. Imprinting – the same invariant sequence of words will be exposed to the learner a few more times at reasonable
intervals until TL-NL meaning equivalence has been established; for instance, moving from the sentence to a
passage or connected discourse (as recommended by Wong, ibid.) into which the language point has been
written. The new structure is intended for holistic (gestalt) processing and easy recall;
3. Explication of how the rules of a given grammar area operate in the learners‘ steady-state L1: examining,
demonstrating, and bringing to the surface relevant facts and rules in the source language that are only
subconsciously known to the learners, thus leading to L1 awareness.308 That is, the learner is introduced to rules
and particulars s/he intuitively knows and subconsciously applies in performance, but which s/he may have
never consciously pondered upon. More attention here is being paid to higher-order rules of use than lowerorder rules of formation.

Thus, the first major step is getting the learners to observe and notice patterns in their NL. This finds
support e.g. in Gabryś-Barker‘s (2005) evidence that source language proficiency is influential on L2 development.
Things that have once been explicated have the preponderance of not becoming obliterated and can be recalled as the
need arises. This has one more advantage: we can explicate only those L1 items that are relevant to the L2,
disregarding ones that may cause confusion. We should also bear in mind the fact that learners often cope with
structures that are totally different from their equivalents in the students‘ native language precisely because they are
so unexpected and ―bizarre‖ and stick in the memory, which can thus further enhance retention.
4. A passage is subsequently made to the explanation of relevant L2 regularities – something more novel this time,
being the target proper of the instruction. Since the learners are already au fait with some representative
exemplars of the construction in question, the anxiety before having to master some new principles is reduced
appreciably, with the reassuring feeling of a déjà vu (Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, 2003b: 126) or déjà entendu. What
happens now is raising the learners‘ consciousness of FL features—accumulating insight into what the learners
do not yet know in the FL, without necessarily directly instilling the rules (Rutherford, 1987; James, 1998:
260)—revealing the underlying TL pattern and offering a rule, but without losing sight of the L 1 principle,
showing parallels between both languages. New knowledge representations are not assimilated and stored in an
isolated area of the brain, but will always be related (by neural circuits or other means) to areas storing some
other information – for instance, implicit L1 knowledge that has become explicated (Gozdawa-Gołębiowski,
2003b: 123). This is necessary for making the new knowledge structures available for effective and efficient
recall. Unlike in isolated item-leaning, the NL and TL facts are presented as systemically and systematically
related (op. cit.: 126). Language-awareness tasks sensitize the learner to language phenomena which are present
in both his/her L1 and the TL, but whose overt realization in the two languages may differ. Learners discover
whether the L1 rules are operative in the L2 and vice versa (cf. Fraser‘s (2008) point that teachers expect
modelling to work, while imitation without prior comparing and contrasting is by no means simple, and
Paradowski‘s (2007) concise overview of comparative linguistics rationale).309 The teacher‘s task is to
demonstrate to the learners through comparative analysis that they already know something which they have so
far regarded as mysterious. This eases the burden and is greatly facilitative in lowering the affective filter – a
factor not to be disregarded.
It is essential to note at this point that at the two stages—especially at early levels of proficiency or where
the subject-matter is complicated or would require the introduction of complex taxonomy otherwise—in order to
maximize efficiency the explanations had preferably be formulated in the mother tongue of the learners ―as a more
accessible and cost-effective alternative to the sometimes lengthy and difficult target-language explanation‖ (Ur,
1996: 17; cf. also e.g. Wilen et al. 2004, or Temple et al. 2005). Using the learner‘s L1 to provide examples and
clarify explanation saves time, makes the input more comprehensible than might be possible with the ―sink-or-swim
English-only approach‖ (Temple et al. 2005: 498), and relieves frustration caused by not understanding classroom
instruction presented in the TL only (Balosa, 2006). Humans are limited capacity processors – when learning to
drive a car, we will not be taking a turn at a busy crossroads, glancing in the rear-view mirror, keeping a

308

Language awareness means sensitisation of the learner to the functioning of a mastered language, ―an ability to contemplate
metacognitively a language over which one has therefore developed a coherent and relatively stable set of intuitions: ‗ implicit
knowledge that has become explicit‘‖ (James, 1994: 209; emph. added).
309
The use of mother-tongue exercises is also recommended to vividly help students realise that what works in their mother
tongue may not work in the L2.

914

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
conversation going, operating the CD player, and applying mascara (the fairer sex) all at the same time, 310 unless our
destination is massacre. When introducing a new concept or piece of information about the language system, care
should be taken not to rock the boat too much, to ensure that the learners concentrate on the content of the rule,
rather than direct all intellectual effort at painstakingly deciphering its metalinguistic wording. As a rule it is more
important for the learners to understand a concept or grammar point than it is for it to be explained exclusively in the
TL. A FL learner will—even at very advanced stages—still think in the L1 when performing more and less complex
mental operations, such as e.g. mathematical calculations (only 23% of the full-time first-year students at the
Institute of English Studies, University of Warsaw who were asked by the author in an anonymous questionnaire in
which language they perform simple addition, subtraction or multiplication tasks when abroad, indicated English).
Similarly, many errors had better be discussed in the L1.
5. Once the relevant material has been explained, an interface—a contact area between the two language
systems—is forged, usually consisting in modifying the L1 rule to accommodate relevant L2 data (GozdawaGołębiowski, 2003a: 206). This has already been advocated by Leontiev, though surprisingly the implications of
the relevant passage have gone unnoticed in the literature and praxis:
As teachers, our task is to ―get rid‖ of the intermediate stage as quickly as possible and to bring the
psychological structure of the utterance in the foreign tongue as close as possible to that which operates in the
mother tongue. This means providing the student expediently with a system of operations which will not only
correspond to the real psychological structure of the speech act, and will be easy to convert and put into
effect, but will also ensure maximum support from the habits for the construction of utterances in the mother
tongue. … The learner should not so much be acquainted with the rules of translation from the mother tongue
to the foreign one … as, more importantly, with the rules governing the transition from the speech operations
of the mother tongue to those of the foreign one. (A. A. Leontiev, 1981: 27; emph. added)

The Language Interface Model meets this postulate successfully, allowing the language learner to link new
language items with his/her present knowledge or experience; i.e., placing it within his/her Zone of Proximal
Development (Vygotsky, 1934/1962), taken to denote ―the layer of skill or knowledge… just beyond that with which
the learner is currently capable of coping‖ (Williams &amp; Burden, 1997: 40); ―the distance between the actual
developmental level as determined by independent problem solving and the level of potential development as
determined through problem solving under adult guidance, or in collaboration with more capable peers‖ (Vygotsky,
1934/1978: 86), thus somewhat reminiscent of Krashen‘s ―i + 1‖ axiom. The rationale can be lucidly represented in
the following manner:
ZPD

selfregulation

Figure 2: The Zone of Proximal Development

The inner circle of self-regulation denotes the learner‘s independent mental capabilities, e.g. strategic
behaviours engaged in by learners with the aim of helping them to guide and monitor their actions when confronted
with difficulty in performing a task. Beyond this area lie activities which can only be performed with external
assistance. In the case of language learning, a new item can be internalized when the learner is able to connect it with
his/her present knowledge or experience; i.e., when it lies within the person‘s idiosyncratic ZPD; any goal beyond is
inaccessible (van Lier, 1996: 190–1). Naturally, with the aid of pedagogical intervention, or scaffolding, the
learner‘s command and comprehension of the FL system gradually expands, s/he can carry out tasks at higher levels
without the guidance of the teacher, slowly approximating to the TL system. Thus, pedagogic intervention ought to
be tailored to the learner‘s needs; a postulate which logically connects with the cognitive mediation theory of Israeli
psychologist Reuven Feuerstein (Feuerstein et al. 1980), which takes the role of the mediator (teacher) to be the key
factor in the process of learning, placing him/her between the learner and the material. His/her role is to select,
310

Attention may be freed up to focus on these other matters while weaving through the traffic ―non impediti ratione
congitatonis‖ [unencumbered by the thought process; as goes the motto of radio show Car Talk aired from Cambridge, MA] only
once the routine has been automatised.

915

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
sequence, pace, frame, highlight, compare, interpret, review, break down, synthesize and present stimuli in a way
most apt to facilitate optimal learning, making them both accessible and meaningful; to diagnose the learning
potential and then provide support in transforming it into performance (Salo, 2006). This includes taking into
account the learner‘s current knowledge and past experiences311 (which also implies the mother tongue!).
Subsequent carefully monitored practice first expects the learner to apply the FL rules to L1 (!) examples.
Precisely that: foreign rules are to be applied to mother-tongue texts. Focusing on the meaning and form at the same
time overcomes the problem mentioned by Niżegorodcew (2005) that form-oriented input (principally
morphosyntactic, as lexical and phonological feedback are typically perceived correctly; Gass, 2008) is unsuccessful
if not interpreted as such (see also Gass‘ (op. cit.) observation that feedback may fail to be accurately perceived,
going over the learners‘ heads); the shift of focus to the linguistic code simultaneously results in a deeper semantic
processing of the message‘s content (Heine, 2008).
This may look like building the L2 on the L1—which, to a certain extent, it is—but the mother tongue only
acts as foundations upon which the construction proper is mounted, which with time become invisible, but remain
present at all times.

6. Only then does the teaching move to more traditionally sanctioned TL exercises, but even then in a progressive,
transitional fashion: the first assignments being translational equivalents of the L1 examples (in order to preserve
the familiarity appeal), subsequently moving on to entirely novel ones, where the learner tackles the tasks
without the aid of a déjà vu – as in real-life contexts. Thus, the tasks are sequenced by escalation of their
cognitive complexity on the resource-dispersing dimension (i.e. by increasing the performative/procedural
demands) from simpler ones, whose aim is to stabilise the new elements of the IL system, to pushed output,
conjectured by Robinson‘s (2001, 2005, 2010) Multiple Resources Attentional Model and his extension of
Cromer‘s (1974) Cognition Hypothesis to promote control and automatisation of the learner‘s existing L2
resources by directing his/her attention to aspects of the language, thereby leading to enhanced retention. 312 The
resulting L1:L2 merger is expected to become automatised and—with sufficient frequency of use—
proceduralised, thus conducive to accuracy-cum-fluency and compensating for the lack of native intuitions
(Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, 2003b: passim). Additionally, such gradation of task complexity has been proven to
diminish output processing anxiety (Robinson, 2010). The aim of this competence expansion stage, effected
through the wisely constructed meaning-focused tasks, is making the learners collapse their already conscious
knowledge of the FL system with their already explicit representations of their subconscious L1 competence and
integrate the rules, ultimately expecting submersion and subconscious absorption thereof, bringing about
multicompetence effects and allowing for the obliteration of the rules governing the structure of the utterance
from the learner‘s conscious mind (A. A. Leontiev, 1981: 23). This is consistent with James‘ (1998: 263)
observation that ―explanation is, in effect, comparative description: quite simply EA [error analysis].‖ Although
formula memorization poses a lighter learning burden, rule internalization is undeniably more successful.
Additionally, reflection about the best way to translate conceptual content into an adequate linguistic form in the
problem-solving tasks promotes a deeper semantic processing of content, as it carries the potential of
consideration of the semantic relationships between the concepts, an effect intensified by switching to the FL
(Heine, 2008), as in this last stage of the LIM.

311

The teacher‘s task is, therefore, also to identify how to tap into the strengths within each learner‘s repertoire as well as the
weaknesses. In the Feuersteinian approach emphasis thus shifts from product to process, where developing learning strategies
assumes at least as crucial importance as the subject knowledge itself, with the goal of the qualitative teacher-learner interactions
to equip the latter with skills and strategies strengthening his/her personal motivation and competence to learn, thereby helping
him/her move along the continuum ―from dependence on the mediator to independence from the mediator‖ (Levine, 2001: 4),
when the learner has internalised the strategies taught and can apply them to contexts outside of the instructional content.
Mediation can thus be seen as promoting learner autonomy, assisting him/her in the acquisition process (Williams &amp; Burden,
1997: 67–8).
312
Basing on findings of air traffic communication studies, Robinson (p.c., March 11, 13, 2008) theorizes that gradual increase of
the cognitive demands of tasks will push learners to greater accuracy and complexity in L2 production also in situations when a
car driver communicates with his/her pilot over route directions. However, there are three qualitative differences between the two
situations. Primo, owing to an aircraft‘s cruising speed, decisions taken on board must be made in fractions of the time available
on the road, where you can slow down or even pull over (which only choppers and the Mig-21 can do in the air, and even then for
but three seconds). Secundo, an airline pilot has to take the vertical dimension into account, a coordinate largely irrelevant on the
ground (even in F1 racing). Tertio, the fatal risks involved in a false manoeuvre are much higher in the air, with meagre cha nces
of survival. Consequently, the former situation is in itself inherently more complex, therefore requiring precision of expression as
repetition and reformulation may be costly; cf. the well-known case of the Spanish passenger plane nearly shot down when the
pilot‘s announcement ―Fire on board‖ was understood by the air traffic control as ―Three men on board‖, or the 2006 air crash on
the Canary Islands owing to miscomprehension of the term ―at take-off‖.

916

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Results
Winwood Reade is good upon the subject,‖ said Holmes. ―He remarks that, while the individual man is an insoluble puzzle, in the
aggregate he becomes a mathematical certainty. You can, for example, never foretell what any one man will do, but you can say
with precision what an average number will be up to. Individuals vary, but percentages remain constant. So says the statistician.
—Sir Arthur Conan Doyle The Sign of the Four (1890: Ch. 10. The End of the Islander)

The findings of a prolonged controlled classroom experiment indicate enhanced performance and retention
in experimental population taught via the Language Interface Model over control groups even in a deferred post-test,
2 to 5 months after the instruction in the grammar areas taught was over (Paradowski, 2007: 149–200). The testing
tools covered six distinct areas of English grammar, both structural and lexical in nature: articles, relative pronouns
and adverbs, ―reported speech‖, preparatory ―there‖ vs. ―it‖, ―as‖ vs. ―like‖, and conditional structures (four of these,
sc. articles, relativisation patterns, word order in reported questions, and existential constructions, are aspects which
feature on Odlin‘s (2005) list of points whose presence or absence in the NL of the learner impinges on the success
of SLA). Where raw final test data are concerned, only one CTR group failed to yield results which would be
significantly below the performance of the EXP group. With the analysis shifting to analyse progress
counterbalanced against a pre-test baseline, all the results prove significant.
It thus seems that overall the Language Interface Method does perform its task satisfactorily, even though
not many students from the treatment population declared independent attempts at metalingual reflection. Even if the
effectiveness is not necessarily supreme in all areas of grammar, it is, at least, rarely significantly inferior to other
methods (enjoying an average advantage of 13.1 per cent for the EXP UP progress and 21.38 per cent for the
admittedly patchier EXP ADV data), and the participants‘ performance was maintained several months following the
treatment; facts not to be ignored by language teachers and methodologists alike. The method seems particularly
suited to teaching traditional systemic areas requiring manipulation of form (such as ―reported speech‖ and
conditionals), although it also proceeds fairly well where the task merely demands the insertion of a lexical item
(expletives, relativizers, and ―as‖ vs. ―like‖). One area where amelioration is clearly needed is the procedure for
enhancing learners‘ awareness of the article system.313
The essential benefit of the LIM is that the results of the instruction hold when the learners have ceased
receiving it for some time – a long-term pedagogical goal certainly more desirable, commendable and far-reaching
than just short-term retention displayed in an immediate follow-up test. Importantly, the method turns out to be
particularly successful for less-advanced learners as, despite strong correspondence between the participants‘ initial
and final proficiency (r = .5356 for EXP UP and .6281 for EXP ADV), progress correlated negatively with the initial
proficiency in both groups (r = -0.3907 and -0.4235, correspondingly)! Thus—barring articles—LIM appears to be
more effective in helping FL learners master the relevant properties of English than other approaches.

The model‘s potential
Now this is not the end. This is not, even, the beginning of the end.
—Winston Spencer-Churchill‘s (1942, Nov 10) speech given at Lord Mayor‘s Luncheon, Mansion House, London, in response to
the Allied victory over the German Afrika Korps at the Second Battle of El Alamein

The model can successfully be implemented in other fields of FL communicative competence. Thus for
instance in a course on L2 writing conventions, discourse organization, structure of information and information
packaging, the learners could first experimentally be taught the principles and asked to apply these in their mother
tongue—say, a guided composition or two—before struggling with composing a FL text, which will probably
provide several other challenges than just requiring to remember the principles that were mentioned during one or
two classes at most. If the learners manage to successfully apply L2 strategies in L1 texts, thus becoming better
trained in learning to ―think‖ in the way preferred in the target language, success lies within reach. By such
differences I mean for instance, in terms of clause combining, the preference for coordination in English contrasted
against more intensive use of subordination devices found in French, as pointed out by Chuquet and Paillard (1987),
or the English preference for non-finite clauses vs. tensed ones in French, mentioned by Vinay and Darbelnet (1958).

313

The findings might suggest that inasmuch as articles need to be employed in nearly every utterance, each speaker‘s
idiosyncratic usage is so entrenched that it is resilient to change (the variation between the initial and final measure—per group—
rarely exceeded 5 per cent in a test containing 122 gaps). It is also conceivable that where the rules of grammar may seem
ephemeral, intangible or conflicting—as it may seem in many instances of article usage—participants‘ performance becomes
erratic and not quite reflecting their competence. Alternatively, the weaker results over this one area of grammar might act ually
validate the LIM showing that it is most effective where you have something to transfer from (rather than a functional category
nonexistent in the learners‘ L1; Romuald Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, p.c. 2007).

917

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Similarly, if not more importantly, a crucial part of expertise in ELF is ―pragmatic fluency‖ (House, 2006).
The importance of developing pragmatic competence—the ability to employ TL resources in an appropriate way for
particular contexts—has been ascertained in current models of communicative competence. The suggestion that
contrastive analysis include a pragmalinguistic dimension is by no means new – cf. e.g. Gleason (1968), Hartmann
(1977), Sajavaara (1977/81a), or Riley (1979/81). House (1997) argues that the notion of TL awareness be extended
beyond aspects of the linguistic system to the communicative use of the language in context. She calls forth several
enjoyable examples from both authentic interaction and role-plays between native speakers of English and German
to demonstrate how not only words and idioms, but also lengthier formally analogical constructions can turn out to
be deceptive faux amis, leading to inadvertent misunderstanding and irritation on the part of the interlocutor
(2003:129-130). She thus emphasises the necessity of the acquisition of linguistically and culturally contrastive
knowledge, of knowledge about the diversity of languages in general, and the worth of multilingualism and
multiculturalism, so emphatically promoted especially in the CEF ideology.
If communicative behaviour—e.g. Grice‘s (1967) conversational maxims or Lakoff‘s (1976) rules of
politeness—were of universal nature across different languages (as assumed by critics of the Communicative
Approach in late 1970s, cf. e.g. Mùller 1977), the universality of communicative skills and the possibility of their
transfer from the L1 would void any discussion of the benefits or necessity of awareness in FLL. Yet, a succession of
research studies in the last three decades indicate that communicative norms, scripts and preferences differ between
languages and cultures in certain, describable ways (House 1997:70). Thus, for instance, Brown and Lewinson‘s
(1987) claims to the universality of their model of politeness quickly drew flak, especially from researchers dealing
with non-western languages and cultures (e.g. Watts et al. 1992; Ide et al. 1992), who demonstrated that e.g. AngloSaxon and Japanese norms of politeness differ so profoundly that in no way can universality be invoked: the
Japanese being characterised by the obligatory choice of a linguistic indicator and so-called ‗discernment‘, through
which the speaker is obliged by certain social conventions to use ‗polite‘ speech, while Anglo-Saxon speakers are
free in their choice of linguistic means. Further examples of this sort abound; e.g. a French compliment is never
followed by an expression of thanks (a ‗Merci beaucoup‘ might sooner be interpreted as an ironic commentary;
Riley 1979/81:122). Also Leech‘s (1983) Politeness Maxims cannot be taken as universal communicative principles,
as demonstrated by Thomas‘ (1995) numerous examples of their culture-specific realisations. For instance the Tact
Maxim, though central to western concepts of politeness in that certain speech acts such as requests or summons are
customarily emasculated by a proposal of ‗optionality‘, this is not so in e.g. Chinese (Spencer-Oatey 1992). Several
differences were proven even between so closely related languages and cultures as English and German, e.g.
concerning the Agreement Maxim and indirectness in the realisation of various illocutionary acts (cf. e.g. House
1996a, House &amp; Kasper 1981, 1987). Even within one language, interactive behaviour may clearly differ: Riley
(1979/81:135) contends that it is the case with meetings, business negotiations, telephone calls, causal encounters
and other situations on either side of the English Channel.
All these and several other studies quoted in House (1997:71f.) provide evidence that norms of politeness,
communicative styles and preferences vary depending on language and culture. It is therefore de rigueur for learning
FL in use and for the development of communicative competence to recognise that these norms form an essential
component and as such should be explicitly taught. Crucially, in Schmidt and Frota‘s (1986) ‗notice the gap‘
principle, it is not merely the linguistic forms that require attention, but also—simultaneously—the relevant
contextual factors (functions) and pragmatic principles (context) regulating the application of these forms in a certain
cultural macrocontext. This channelled attention brings the contextualised and regularly used forms to awareness.
Schmidt (1993:31) hypothesises a close connection between noticing what is in the input—the linguistic form and its
broadened context—and the corresponding intentional learning (where consciousness as ‗intentionality‘ plays a
role). Thus, necessary for the acquisition of L2 pragmatic factors is directed attention to the linguistic form, its
functional meaning, and the relevant contextual factors. For a thorough learning and retention of these, the learner‘s
attention should be consciously directed at certain pragmatic phenomena in the input and s/he should try and analyse
their meaning for deeper linguistic and conceptual generalisations. Schmidt (op. cit.:36) emphasises that FL
realisations of pragmatic functions are often unclear to the learners, insofar as the relevant contextual factors that
require attention are not self-evident (are ‗non-salient‘), or are ignored because they so inconceivably grossly differ
from the L1 phenomena314. It may thus happen that the FL learner will pass years without directing his/her attention
at the important pragmatic factors and realising the pragmatic differences between the L1 and the TL. Contrary to
what Schmidt (ibid.) proposes, House (1997:82) argues that the fact this is not so during the acquisition of the
mother tongue, when children together with lexico-grammatical competence pari passu acquire communicative
competence, cannot be explained away by the positioning of a ‗Pragmatic Acquisition Device‘, whose strength
weakens with age to become inert after a critical period, but it stands in direct connection with the continual effort on
the part of the parents and other caretakers to explicitly teach this communicative competence. If, however, one did
314

Although consider for instance the shift from rejecting to accepting compliments, visible among young Poles (probably as yet
another aspect of globalisation).

918

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
assume the existence of such a ‗PAD‘ and of an early and sustained contact with the target language and culture as a
precondition for acquiring native pragmatic competence (many studies document the non-native pragmatic
behaviour of advanced language learners), this would at least show that positing a NS norm for post-pubescent
learners again misses the point (House &amp; Kasper 2000:115).
While mere transfer of knowledge and skills from the L1 does not warrant development of appropriate
communicative competence in the L2, handling pragmatic and discourse features of the TL in the classroom has been
proven to be conducive to increased operationality in the use thereof. Thus, House calls for promoting
communicative awareness, i.e. knowledge of communicative act, comprising not just the so-called ‗acts of speech‘
(e.g. apologising), but also the weaving of these acts into the whole discourse (1997:68). Equally important is the
fact that this is what learners themselves appreciate. An experiment carried out by House and Kasper (1981), in
which a communicative course was run in two versions, an ‗explicit‘ one raising awareness of the communicative
phenomena that were being imparted, and an ‗implicit‘ one, without the benefit of metalanguage or directed
attention, only increased input and practice in a wider range of scenarios, revealed that only the former corresponded
with the advanced adult FL learners‘ expectations. Also Tateyama et al.‘s (1997) study of learners of Japanese
confirms the hypothesis: the groups taught explicitly performed overall better, and the participants of both (explicitly
and implicitly taught) declared unequivocal preference for the explicit teaching method, where forms, functions and
distribution of language routines is brought to consciousness.
In a longitudinal, 14-week study of two university groups in a communicative course House (1996b)
investigated whether ‗pragmatic fluency‘ (appropriacy and fluency in the realisation of communicative acts) can be
achieved in the FL classroom through mere provision of input coupled with intensive and extensive practice
opportunities (including teacher correction; implicit course variant), or whether additional, explicit,
consciousness/awareness-raising conveyance of language routines (oral explanation and detailed handouts on their
form, function and distribution) and the use of metalanguage in conjunction with input and TL practice leads to
improved results. An important factor in the explicit variant of the course is a contrastive juxtaposition of the norms
of interaction in the L1 and the TL (cf. e.g. House 1996a, 1997). The explicitly, metapragmatically taught group
superseded the other in the use of opening gambits in that they could realised a repertoire of speech acts that was
richer, more varied, norm-sanctioned and interpersonally effective (i.e. referring to the interlocutor), while the group
taught implicitly displayed a visible orientation at the content of the message, and less consideration of their
interlocutor. However, when it came to responsive expressions, both groups displayed similar deficits
(unconventional, non-customary expressions and unexpected, non-normative, minimalist ‗impolite‘ expressions).
House (1997:78-80) puts forward three plausible hypotheses which can account for this lack of attestable impact of
metapragmatic awareness on the improvement of responsive behavior of the learners in everyday interaction:

1.

2.

3.

Through the Auto-Input Hypothesis (Sharwood-Smith 1988), which posits that raising awareness of one‘s own
output is conducive to competence expansion in the FL (those learners who were regularly invited to confront
their own output with metapragmatic explanations eventually displayed improved ‗pragmatic fluency‘);
The underrepresentation of interpersonally focused routines in the realisation of gambits and discourse strategies
could be explained through pragmatic transfer from the learners‘ L1 (German). Although pragmatic transfer
occurred in routine usage of both groups, it was less pronounced in the explicit one, whose classes included the
promotion of analysis and contrastive juxtaposition of the use of the routines in the L 1 and the TL. Thus,
pragmatic transfer can be counteracted and reduced through directed attention at and awareness of L 2-specific
routines, also in the conviction of the students themselves (House 1996b);
Through cognitive overload during responding. Môhle (1994) proposed that the biggest problem for advanced
adult L2 learners in the development of communicative competence and the acquisition of representations in the
mental lexicon is not the representation of pragmatic and discoursal knowledge in the first place, but deficits in
procedural knowledge. Thus, the deficits in response routines evidenced by House‘s learners could be accounted
for by the lack of ‗control of processing‘ on their part, in the sense of Bialystok‘s (1993), i.e. underdeveloped
control strategies, with whose help input must be efficiently processed and knowledge representations
summoned. Such strategies are of utmost importance for the achievement of communicative competence: the
provision of metapragmatic knowledge alone is insufficient; the acquisition of procedural know-how and the
availability of ‗executive mechanisms‘ must come in as a prerequisite for spontaneous, ready-to-use FL
communicative competence in the form of a corresponding procedural representation of means of speech.

Still, the study indicated that consciousness (as ‗attention‘, ‗awareness‘, and ‗control‘) plays a judicious and
beneficial role in the development of pragmatically appropriate and fluent communication in the FL, and that the
provision of metapragmatic information and the raising of awareness of pragmatic and discoursal phenomena is
919

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
essential as counterpoise to transfer from the L1, as a means of acquiring a differentiated, interpersonally potent
repertoire of linguistic routines, and of promoting ‗pragmatic fluency‘ (House 1997:80-81). It seems insufficient to
expose FL learners to sociolinguistically appropriate varied input and to trust that pragmatic and discoursal
knowledge will develop by and of itself. FL learners do not activate universally pragmatic competence or even
positive L1 transfer, if these have not been taught reaching their attention and awareness. For the transmission of
such knowledge a classroom setting is, according to House (op. cit.:81f.) very well suited.
The importance of this area of language also gains support from other authors. In an empirical study
Bardovi-Harlig and Dôrnyei (1997), for instance, reveal the difference between the role of the thus far largely
neglected awareness-raising of pragmatic-discoural phenomena in the learning of ESL and EFL. Rather than these,
in the latter setting, teachers and students were more cognizant of grammatical phenomena, and they evaluated
grammar mistakes as more severe, which was the opposite in the case of ESL. The authors thus emphasise that,
especially in the EFL context, ―awareness raising and noticing activities should supplement the introduction of
pragmatically relevant input and structured L2 learning‖ (op. cit.:27).
Even though this may be more difficult to implement in linguistically heterogeneous classes, with the
increasing importance of ‗intercultural competence‘ House insists on bringing learners‘ awareness of linguistic and
cultural similarities and differences, differences in value systems, mentalities, communicative preferences and
conventions to the foreground of FL teaching. Her examples demonstrate that even in so closely related languages as
English and German, the communicative styles differ markedly – to what extent would that have to be between
typologically distant languages, with totally different cultural traditions to boot (2003:131)? Thus, the awareness of
pragmatic and discourse phenomena in FLL should include an understanding of the contrasts and similarities in
these areas between the TL and the L1 (L2, Ln…). Pragmatic competence would yield perfectly to the languageinterface rationale; an appropriate research project is being prepared in this regard. If the learners transfer pragmatic
patterns anyway, let us enable them to transfer ones which will be appropriate. Moreover, research proves that the
provision of explicit pragmatic information is only beneficial when it is not merely based on unreliable NS
intuitions, but on the results of contrastive-pragmatic research (cf. e.g. House 1994, 1995, 1997), especially as
comparison of course and authentic dialogues revealed frequently discomfittingly gross discrepancies (cf. e.g.
Bardovi-Harlig et al. 1991), thus once again reinforcing the contrastive rationale. Of beneficial influence on the
development of communicative competence is the combination of intensive communicative practice with explicit
awareness-raising, e.g. observation tasks wherein the learner‘s attention is directed at specific characteristic
communicative features of interactional FL behaviour (cf. e.g. Bardovi-Harlig et al. 1991; Rose 1997), especially at
the pragmatic contrasts between linguistic behaviour in the L1 and the TL (House 1997:82f.).
What is important, House (ibid.) emphasises, is that the pragmatic norms should merely be brought to the
learners‘ awareness so that—if they so wish for themselves—they know when and how they contravene them in
given circumstances, and can predict the repercussions and sanctions of such deviations; not necessarily accept and
adopt these NS norms. Through awareness-raising learners should in no way be expected to become ―like the L2
NS‖; rather, they should be empowered to actively indicate their distance or proximity (consciously create their own
―sphere of interculturality,‖ Kramsch 1993), and to form their subjective decisions concerning what is appropriate
for them, so that they are not forced into—as Harder (1980) aptly called them—adapted crippled ―reduced
personalities,‖ desperately attempting to be like indigenous native speakers to whom they will never belong. Thus,
rather than adaptation and convergence with the NS norm, the FL learner had better be conceived as someone inbetween. Such a move away from the dominating (and frustrating) norm, advocated in the previous chapter of this
dissertation, is easier to effect when the learner is aware of it (House 1997:83). In this way, communicative
awareness helps the learner be more efficient cognitively, more flexible socially, and more enriching personally
(ibid.).
While incipient research in IL pragmatics focused on the learners‘ deviations from NS norms, blaming
pragmatic failure on interference from the L1, evidence shows that L2 users differ significantly in their employment
of pragmalinguistic strategies from monolingual speakers of either language (Ewert &amp; Bromberek-Dyzman 2006),
hence indicating IL  L1 transfer at the pragmatic level. Recognised as the Intercultural Style Hypothesis (BlumKulka 1991), this states that the influence between the L2 and L1 is bidirectional, which is why advanced L2 learners
will employ similar pragmalinguistic strategies in relevant situations in either language. If so, this offers a promising
perspective indeed for an interfacial model of TL pragmatic training of the learners, where appropriate strategies and
speech acts would first be practised on the grounds of the L1.

920

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

REFERENCES:
Balosa, David (2006, Mar) Three examples of better English learning through the L1. Essential Teacher Compleat
Links 3.1. Retrieved April 22, 2006 from http://www.tesol.org/s_tesol/secetdoc.asp?CID=1222&amp;DID=5720

Bardovi-Harlig, Kathleen, Beverly A. S. Hartford, Rebecca Mahan-Taylor, Mary J. Morgan &amp; Dudley W. Reynolds
(1991) Developing pragmatic awareness: closing the conversation. ELT Journal 45/1: 4–15.
Bardovi-Harlig, Kathleen &amp; Zoltán Dôrnyei (1997, Mar) Do language learners recognize pragmatic violations?
Pragmatic vs. grammatical awareness in instructed L2 learning. paper delivered at the annual conference of
the American Association of Applied Linguistics, Orlando, FL.

Bialystok, Ellen (1993) Symbolic representation and attentional control in pragmatic competence. In Kasper,
Gabriele &amp; Shoshana Blum-Kulka (Eds) Interlanguage Pragmatics. New York: Oxford University Press,
43–57.

Blum-Kulka, Shoshana (1991) Interlanguage pragmatics: The case of requests. In Phillipson, Robert, Eric
Kellerman, Larry Selinker, Michael Sharwood Smith &amp; Merrill Swain (Eds) Foreign/Second Language
Pedagogy Research. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters, 255–72.
Bowerman, Melissa (2005) Why can‘t you ―open‖ a nut or ―break‖ a cooked noodle? Learning covert object
categories in action word meanings. In Gershkoff-Stowe, Lisa &amp; David H. Rakison (Eds) Building Object
Categories in Developmental Time. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 209–43.

Bowerman, Melissa (2008, Mar 12) Language acquisition and semantic typology. Plenary address delivered at the
33rd International LAUD Symposium ‗Cognitive Approaches to Second/Foreign Language Processing:
Theory and Pedagogy‘. Landau/Pf.

Brown, Penelope &amp; Stephen Levinson (1987) Politeness. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Caine, Renate Nummela &amp; Geoffrey Caine (1994) Making Connections. Teaching and the Human Brain.
Parsippany, NJ: Dale Seymour Publications.
Chuquet, Hélène &amp; Michel Paillard (1987) Approche linguistique des problèmes de traduction anglais-français.
Paris: Ophrys.

Coe, Norman, Robin Rycroft &amp; Pauline Ernest (1983) Writing Skills. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
921

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Cook, Vivian J. (2001) Using the first language in the classroom. Canadian Modern Language Review/La Revue
canadienne des langues vivantes 57/3: 402–23.

Council of Europe (2001) Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning, Teaching,
Assessment.

Cambridge:

Cambridge

University

Press.

Also

available

for

download

from

http://www.coe.int/t/dg4/linguistic/Source/Framework_EN.pdf

Cromer, Richard (1974) The development of language and cognition: The cognition hypothesis. In Foss, Brian (Ed.)
New Perspectives in Child Development. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 184–252.

de Bot, Kees (2004) The multilingual lexicon: Modeling selection and control. International Journal of
Multilingualism 1/1: 17–32.
Doyle, Sir Arthur Conan (1890) The Sign of the Four. Lippincott‘s Monthly Magazine. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott
Company, 147–225.
Ellis, Nick C. (2010) Construction learning as category learning. In: Pùtz, Martin &amp; Laura Sicola (Eds) Cognitive
Processing in Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 27-48.

Ellis, Rod (1989) Are classrom and naturalistic acquisition the same? A study of the classroom acquisition of
German word order rules. Studies in Second Language Acquisition 11/3: 305–28.
———— (1995) Interpretation tasks for grammar teaching. TESOL Quarterly 29/1: 87–105.
Ewert, Anna &amp; Katarzyna Bromberek-Dyzman (2006, May 18) The Intercultural Style Hypothesis: Semantic
strategies in L1 and L2 refusals. paper delivered at the XVIIIth International Conference on Foreign/Second
Language Acquisition, Szczyrk.
Feuerstein, Reuven, Ya‘acov Rand, Mildred B. Hoffman &amp; Ronald Miller (1980) Instrumental Enrichment: An
intervention program for cognitive modifiability. Baltimore, MD: University Park Press.
Filatova, Ksénia L. (2010) Third language acquisition, macrocategories and synonymy. In: Pùtz, Martin &amp; Laura
Sicola (Eds) Cognitive Processing in Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John
Benjamins, 85-96.

Franceschini, Rita, Daniela Zappatore &amp; Cordula Nitsch (2003) Lexicon in the brain: what neurobiology has to say
about languages. In Cenoz, Jasone, Britta Hufeisen &amp; Ulrike Jessner (Eds) The Multilingual Lexicon.
Dordrecht: Kluwer, 153–166.

922

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Fraser, Helen (2008, Mar 12) Cognitive theory as a tool for teaching pronunciation. Plenary address delivered at the
33rd International LAUD Symposium ‗Cognitive Approaches to Second/Foreign Language Processing:
Theory and Pedagogy‘. Landau/Pf.
Gabryś-Barker, Danuta (2005) Aspects of Multilingual Storage, Processing and Retrieval. Katowice: University of
Silesia Press.
Gass, Susan M. (2008, Mar 11) Interaction: From description to explanation. Plenary address delivered at the 33 rd
International LAUD Symposium ‗Cognitive Approaches to Second/Foreign Language Processing: Theory
and Pedagogy‘. Landau/Pf.

Gleason, Henry Allen, Jr. (1968) Contrastive analysis in discourse structure. In Alatis, James E. (Ed.) Contrastive
Linguistics and its Pedagogical Implications [Monograph Series on Languages and Linguistics 21. Report
of the 19th Annual Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and Language Studies] Washington, DC:
Georgetown University Press, 39–63.
Gozdawa-Gołębiowski, Romuald (2003a) Interlanguage Formation. A Study of the Triggering Mechanisms.
Warsaw: Institute of English Studies, University of Warsaw.
———— (2003b) Pedagogical grammar rules: towards a new taxonomy. Anglica 13: Exploring: literature, culture
and language: 119–31.

Grice, Paul (1967) The logic of conversation. Unpublished MS. Berkeley: University of California.
Harder, Peter (1980) Discourse and self-expression – on the reduced personality of the second-language learner.
Applied Linguistics 1: 262–70.

Hartmann, Reinhard R. K. (1977) Contrastive textology and some of its applications. paper delivered at the Annual
Meeting of the British Association for Applied Linguistics.

Heine, Lena (2008, Mar 10) Focus on form and focus on meaning: Contrasting L1 and L2 use in problem solving
situations. Paper presented at the 33rd International LAUD Symposium ‗Cognitive Approaches to
Second/Foreign Language Processing: Theory and Pedagogy‘. Landau/Pf.

House, Juliane (1994) Kontrastive Pragmatik und interkulturelles Lernen: von metapragmatischem Wissen zu
kommunikativem Handeln. In Bausch, Karl-Richard, Herbert Christ &amp; Hans-Jùrgen Krumm (Eds)
Interkulturelles Lernen im Fremdsprachenunterricht. Tùbingen: Narr, 85–96.
———— (1995) Metapragmatische Bewußtheit, sprachliche Routinen und interkulturelles Lernen beim
Wortschatzerwerb im Fremdsprachenunterricht. In Bausch, Karl-Richard, Herbert Christ, Frank G. Kônigs
&amp; Hans-Jùrgen Krumm (Eds) Erwerb und Vermittlung von Wortschatz im Fremdsprachenunterricht.
Tùbingen: Narr, 92–101.
923

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

———— (1996a) Contrastive discourse analysis and misunderstanding: the case of German and English. In
Hellinger, Marlis &amp; Ulrich Ammon (Eds) Contrastive Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 345–62.
———— (1996b) Developing pragmatic fluency in English as a foreign language: routines and metapragmatic
awareness. Studies in Second Language Acquisition 18: 225–52.
———— (1997) Kommunikative Bewußtheit und Fremdsprachenlernen. Fremdsprachen Lehren und Lernen 26:
68–87.
———— (2003) Übersetzen und Missverständnisse. In Barkowski, Hans &amp; Armin Wolff (Eds) Jahrbuch Deutsch
als Fremdsprache. Intercultural German Studies 29. Mùnchen: iudicium Verlag, 107–34.
———— (2006, Feb 9) The role of English as a lingua franca in multilingual and cross-cultural communication.
plenary paper delivered at the conference on Multilingualism &amp; Applied Comparative Linguistics, Vrije
Universiteit Brussel.
———— &amp; Gabriele Kasper (1981) Zur Rolle der Kognition in Kommunikationskursen. Die Neueren Sprachen 80:
42–55.
———— &amp; Gabriele Kasper (1987) Interlanguage pragmatics: requesting in a foreign language. In Lôrscher,
Wolfgang &amp; Rainer Schulze (Eds) Perspectives on Language in Performance. Tùbingen: Narr, 1250–88.
———— &amp; Gabriele Kasper (2000) How to remain a non-native speaker. In Riemer, Claudia (Ed.) Kognitive
Aspekte des Lehrens und Lernens von Fremdsprachen [Cognitive Aspects of Foreign Language Teaching
and Learning]. Festschrift für Willis J. Edmondson zum 60. Geburtstag. Tùbingen: Gunter Narr Verlag,
101–18.

Ide, Sachiko, Berverly Hill, Yukiko M. Carnes, Tsunao Ogino &amp; Akiko Kawasaki (1992) The concept of politeness:
an empirical study of American English and Japanese. In Watts, Richard J., Sachiko Ide &amp; Konrad Ehlich
(Eds) Politeness in Language: Studies in its History, Theory and Practice [Trends in Linguistics – Studies
and Monographs 59] Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 281–97.

Jackson, Yvette (2002) Comprehension and discipline literacy: the key to high school achievement. Retrieved from
www.newhorizons.org/strategies/literacy/jackson.htm

James, Carl (1980) Contrastive Analysis. London: Longman.
———— (1994) Explaining grammar to its learners. In Bygate, Martin, Alan Tonkyn &amp; Eddie Williams (Eds)
Grammar and the Language Teacher. New York: Prentice Hall, 203–14.

924

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
———— (1998) Errors in Language Learning and Use. Exploring error analysis. London: Longman.
Keddle, Julia Starr (2004) The CEF and the secondary school syllabus. In Morrow, Keith (Ed.) Insights from the
Common European Framework. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 43–54.
Kielhôfer, Bernd (1994) Wôrter lernen, behalten und erinnern. Neusprachliche Mitteilungen aus Wissenschaft und
Praxis 47: 211–20.

Kittredge, Audrey K. &amp; Gary S. Dell (2008, Jun 23) When crossing a rift, every word counts. Paper presented at the
3rd International Conference on Cognitive Science, Russian Academy of Science Institute of
Psychology/Interregional Association for Cognitive Studies/Russian Language Development Centre,
Moscow.

Klein, Wolfgang (1986) Second Language Acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Kramsch, Claire (1993) Context and Culture in Language Teaching. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Krzeszowski, Tomasz P. (1977) Contrastive analysis in a new dimension. Papers and Studies in Contrastive
Linguistics 6: 5–15 [Reprinted in Fisiak, Jacek (Ed.) (1981) Contrastive Linguistics and the Language
Teacher. Oxford: Pergamon, 71–85]

Lakoff, Robin (1976) Language and society. In Wardhaugh, Ronald &amp; H. Douglas Brown (Eds) A Survey of Applied
Linguistics. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 207–28.

Leech, Geoffrey N. (1983) Principles of Pragmatics. London: Longman.

Leontiev, Aleksei Alekseevitch (1981) Psychology and the Language Learning Process [James, C. V. (Ed.)] Oxford:
Pergamon, ch. 3.
Levine, Dori (2001, Aug) Kindling the spark: One Canadian school‘s adaptation of an Israeli Cognitive
Modifiability Model. paper delivered at the International Conference and Training Workshops ‗Unlocking
the Human Potential to Learn,‘ August 18–25, Winnipeg, MB. [Also by Levine, Dori, Michael G. Luther &amp;
Gabrielle Wagner in Gamlin, Peter J., Michael G. Luther &amp; Gabrielle Wagner (Eds) Exploring Human
Potential. Facilitating growth in the new millennium. North York, ON: Captus Press]

Lewis, Michael (1993) The Lexical Approach: The State of ELT and a Way Forward. Hove: Language Teaching
Publications.

Lowie, Wander, Marjolijn Verspoor &amp; Bregtje Seton (2010) Conceptual representations in the multilingual mind: A
study of advanced Dutch students of English. In: Pùtz, Martin &amp; Laura Sicola (Eds) Cognitive Processing
in Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 135-148.

925

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Łukasiewicz, Maria (2006) Implementing the interface model in adult foreign language education. Linguistic and
psychological considerations. Unpublished MA dissertation, Institute of English Studies, University of
Warsaw.
Milne, Alan Alexander (1926) Winnie-the-Pooh. London: Methuen and Co.
Môhle, Dorothea (1994) Deklaratives und procedurales Wissen in der Repräsentation des mentalen Lexicons. In
Bôrner, Wolfgang &amp; Klaus Vogel (Eds) Kognitive Linguistik und Fremdsprachenerwerb. Tùbingen: Narr,
39–50.
Mùller,

R.

(1977)

Kommunikative

Kompetenz

und Arbitrarität

–

pragmalinguistische

Irrwege

der

Fremdsprachendidaktik. Linguistik und Didaktik 8, 63–77.
Niżegorodcew, Anna (2005, May 20) Second Language Acquisition and L2 classroom input. paper presented at the
XVII International Conference on Foreign/Second Language Acquisition, Szczyrk.
Paradowski, Michał B. (2007) Exploring the L1/L2 interface. A study of advanced Polish EFL learners. Doctoral
dissertation, Institute of English Studies, University of Warsaw.

Piechurska-Kuciel, Ewa (1999) The influence of language awareness training on acquisition of English articles.
Doctoral dissertation, University of Opole.

Riley, Philip (1979) Towards a contrastive pragmalinguistics. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 10: 57–
78 [Reprinted in Fisiak, Jacek (Ed.) Contrastive Linguistics and the Language Teacher. Oxford: Pergamon,
121–46]

Robinson, Peter (1997) Generalizability and automaticity of second language learning under implicit, incidental,
enhanced, and instructed conditions. Studies in Second Language Acquisition 19/2 [special issue on
Laboratory Studies of Second Language Acquisition. Guest edited by Jan H. Hulstijn &amp; Robert DeKeyser]:
223–47.
———— (Ed.) (2001) Cognition and Second Language Instruction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
———— (2005) Cognitive abilities, chunk-strength, and frequency effects in implicit artificial grammar and
incidental L2 learning: Replications of Reber, Walkenfeld, and Hernstadt (1991) and Knowlton and Squire
(1996) and their relevance for SLA. Studies in Second Language Acquisition 27/2: 235–68.
———— (2010) Situating and distributing cognition across task demands: The SSARC model of pedagogic task
sequencing. In: Pùtz, Martin &amp; Laura Sicola (Eds) Cognitive Processing in Second Language Acquisition.
Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 243-68.

926

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Rose, Kenneth (1997, Mar) ‗Go-ahead – make my day‘ – Film data in pragmatic research. paper delivered at the
annual conference of the American Association of Applied Linguistics, Orlando, Mar 8–11.

Rutherford, William E. (1987) Second Language Grammar: Learning and Teaching. Harlow: Longman.

Sajavaara, Kari (1977/81a) Contrastive linguistics past and present and a communicative approach. In Sajavaara,
Kari &amp; Jaakko Lehtonen (Eds) Contrastive Papers. Jyväskylä Contrastive Studies 4, 9–30. Jyväskylä:
Department of English. [Reprinted in Fisiak, Jacek (Ed.) Contrastive Linguistics and the Language
Teacher. Oxford: Pergamon, 33–56]
Salo, Olli-Pekka (2006, Jun 9) How to make use of ZPD in foreign language education? The case of teaching
Swedish grammar to Finnish learners. paper delivered at the conference ‗Language in Action – Vygotsky
and Leontievian legacy today‘, University of Jyväskylä.

Schachter, Jacquelyn (1996) Learning and triggering in adult L2 acquisition. In Gillian Brown, Kirsten Malmkjaer &amp;
John Williams (Eds) Competence and Performance in SLA. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 70–
87.

Schmidt, Richard W. (1990) The role of consciousness in second language learning. Applied Linguistics 11/2: 129–
58.
———— (1993) Consciousness, learning and interlanguage pragmatics. In Kasper, Gabriele &amp; Shoshana BlumKulka (Eds) Interlanguage Pragmatics. New York: Oxford University Press, 21–42.
———— (1994) Deconstructing consciousness in search of useful definitions for applied linguistics. In Hulstijn,
Jan H. &amp; Richard Schmidt (Eds) Consciousness in Second Language Learning. AILA Review 11: 11–26.
———— &amp; Sylvia Frota (1986) Developing basic conversational ability in a second language. In Day, Richard
(Ed.) Talking to Learn. Rowley, MA: Newbury House, 237–326.

Singleton, David (2005, May 19) Conceptions of the Second Language Mental Lexicon and approaches to Second
Language vocabulary teaching: a historical perspective. Plenary paper delivered at the XVII International
Conference on Foreign/Second Language Acquisition, Szczyrk.

Spencer-Oatey, Helen (1992) Cross-cultural politeness: British and Chinese conceptions of the tutor-student
relationship. Unpublished dissertation, Lancaster University.

Swain, Merrill &amp; Sharon Lapkin (1995) Problems in output and the cognitive processes they generate: A step
towards second language learning. Applied Linguistics 16/3: 371–91.

927

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Tateyama, Yumiko, Gabriele Kasper, Laura P. Mui, Hui-Mian Tay &amp; Ong-on Thananart (1997) Explicit and implicit
teaching of pragmatic routines. In Bouton, Larry F. (Ed.) Pragmatics and Language Learning 8: 163–77.
Urbana, IL: Division of English as an International Language, University of Illinois, at Urbana-Champaign.
Taylor, John R. (2008, Mar 13) Language in the mind. Plenary address delivered at the 33 rd International LAUD
Symposium ‗Cognitive Approaches to Second/Foreign Language Processing: Theory and Pedagogy‘.
Landau/Pf.

Temple, Charles A., Donna Ogle, Alan N. Crawford &amp; Penny Freppon (2005) All Children Read: Teaching for
literacy in today‘s diverse classrooms. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.

Thomas, Jenny (1995) Meaning in Interaction. London: Longman.

Ur, Penny (1996) A Course in Language Teaching: Practice and Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Van Lier, Leo (1996) Interaction in the Language Curriculum. London: Longman.

VanPatten, Bill (2004) Processing Instruction: Theory, Research, and Commentary. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
Verspoor, Marjolijn H. (2008) What bilingual word associations can tell us. In Boers, Frank &amp; Seth Lindstromberg
(Eds) Cognitive Linguistic Approaches to Vocabulary Teaching. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 261-90.

Vinay, Jean-Paul &amp; Jean Darbelnet (1995) Comparative Stylistics of French and English: A methodology for
translation. [translated and edited by Juan C. Sager &amp; Marie-Josée Hamel]. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
[Original work published 1958: Stylistique compare du français et de l‘anglais. Paris: Didier.]

Vosniadou, Stella (2008, Jun 24) The problem of conceptual change in the learning of science and mathematics.
Plenary address delivered at the 3rd International Conference on Cognitive Science, Russian Academy of
Science Institute of Psychology/Interregional Association for Cognitive Studies/Russian Language
Development Centre, Moscow.

Vygotsky, Lev Semenovich (1962) Thought and language (Eugenia Hanfmann &amp; Gertrude Vakar, Eds &amp; Trans.).
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, chs. 5 &amp; 6. [Original work published (1934b) Мышление и речь. Moscow:
Соцэкгиз]/(1987) Thinking and speech (N. Minick, Trans.). In Rieber, Robert W. &amp; Aaron S. Carton (Eds)
The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky: Vol. 1. Problems of general psychology. New York: Plenum, 39–285.
———— (1978) Mind in Society: The development of higher psychological processes. Cole, Michael, Vera JohnSteiner, Sylvia Scribner &amp; Ellen Souberman (Eds). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. [Original
Проблема развития и распада высших психических функций delivered at the conference Ин-та

928

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
эксперимент медицины, Apr. 28 1934. Also in (1960) Развитие высших психический функций.
Мoscow: Изд-во АПН РСФСР, 364–83]

Watts, Richard, Sachiko Ide &amp; Konrad Ehlich (1992) Introduction. In id. (Eds) Politeness in Language. Berlin:
Mouton de Gruyter, 1–17.

White, Lydia (2000) Second language acquisition: from initial to final state. In Archibald, John (Ed.) Second
Language Acquisition and Linguistic Theory. Malden, MA: Blackwell, 130–55.

Whorf, Benjamin Lee (c. 1936) A linguistic consideration of thinking in primitive communities. In Carroll, John B.
(Ed.) (1956) Language, Thought, and Reality: Selected Writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press, 65–86.
———— (1940) Science and linguistics. Technology Review 42: 227–31, 247–8. [Reprinted in Carroll, John B.
(Ed.) (1956) Language, Thought, and Reality: Selected Writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press, 207–19]

Widdowson, Henry G. (1978) The significance of simplification. Studies in Second Language Acquisition 1/1: 11–20
———— (1979) The significance of simplification. In (1979a: 185–93).

Wilberg, Peter (1987) One to One. Hove: Language Teaching Publications.
Wilen, William, Margaret Ishler Bosse, Janice Hutchison &amp; Richard Kindsvatter (2004) Dynamics of Effective
Secondary Teaching [5th edn] Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
Williams, Marion &amp; Robert L. Burden (1997) Psychology for Language Teachers. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Williams, Sarah &amp; Bjôrn Hammarberg (1998) Language switches in L3 production: implications for a polyglot
speaking model. Applied Linguistics 19/3: 295–333.

Wolff, Dieter (2005, May 20) Integrating language and content in the classroom: the added value of CLIL. plenary
paper delivered at the XVII International Conference on Foreign/Second Language Acquisition, Szczyrk.

Wong, Wynne (2004) The nature of processing instruction. In VanPatten, Bill (Ed.) Processing Instruction: Theory,
Research, and Commentary. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 33–63.

Zybert, Jerzy (1999) Errors in Foreign Language Learning. The Case of Polish Learners of English. Warsaw:
Institute of English Studies.

929

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21940">
                <text>556</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21941">
                <text>Raising Language Learners‘ Pragmatic Awareness and Intercultural  Competence  in Increasingly Multilingual Environments</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21942">
                <text>Paradowski, Michał B.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21943">
                <text>Pragmatic fluency forms crucial part of a language user‘s competence. Norms  of politeness, communicative styles, scripts and preferences differ between languages and  cultures in describable ways, FL realizations of pragmatic functions are often unclear to  the learner where the relevant contextual factors are not self-evident, or are ignored when  they inconceivably grossly differ from the L1 phenomena. Even positive L1 transfer is not  activated if the learner has not been trained, whereas handling pragmatic and discourse  features of the TL in the classroom is conducive to increased operationality in the use  thereof.  A promising perspective for successful intercultural and pragmatic training is the  Interface Model, which proceeds from an explication of how relevant principles operate  in the learners‘ L1 (culture) through an explanation of pertinent L2 norms and subsequent  modification of the L1 principle to accommodate L2 data, to practice first expecting the  learner to apply the appropriate FL strategies and speech acts against an L1 (!) context. By  such a gradual, multi-stage method the learner becomes ‗pragmatically fluent‘ before  commencing to use the operational principles in the TL itself. The juxtaposition and use  of L1 and L2 principles alongside lead to successful automatization and internalization of  the material and the development of pragmatic multicompetence – L2 users differ  significantly in their employment of pragmalinguistic strategies from monolingual  speakers of either language, transferring similar speech acts back and forth between the  tongues in their command. The Interface Model enables them to transfer those patterns of  interactional behavior which will be appropriate.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21944">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21945">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2823" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3594">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/3c6ef6cc5e5a1c48fc788d38d2977cca.pdf</src>
        <authentication>9cbf7d7ab5a6f93cac3a0ad38174419b</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21939">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

COGNITIVE PROCESS OF WRITING FOR SECOND LANGUAGE
YOUNG LEARNERS
Abdullah Pamukcu
International Burch University
Bosnia and Herzegovina
pamukcu74@hotmail.com
Dzenan Salihovic
International Burch University
Bosnia and Herzegovina
dzeno19@hotmail.com
Azamat Akbarov
International Burch University
Bosnia and Herzegovina
aakbarov@ibu.edu.ba

Abstract: Writing is a pleasant and seminal task, but writing is used as multi-leveled
teaching instruments, but instead difficulties, challenging and cognitively demanding.
Writing requires different skills. Students can improve these skills with some outside
support. In this paper, we will try to demonstrate that writing is not only self product of an
individual, but also an outcome of socio-cultural activity, and a cognitive process. In
particular, answers will be sought for the following questions: What factors do affect the
cognitive process of second language young learners‘ writing? How does schema help in
cognitive writing process? How can basic writers be helped to improve their writings?

Introduction
Writing is not only an innate skill that comes naturally. It is also an acquired ability learned or
culturally influenced in an instructional setting in different environments.
Writing skills need practice and studying with previous experience. Students who write and speak in
a foreign language are socially and cognitively challenged. They are cognitively challenged because the
language, the means of communication, is different. They are also socially challenged because of lack of
adequate skills to build normal social relations with others.
Vygotsky regarded language as a critical bridge between the socio-cultural world and individual
mental functioning. (Berk &amp; Winsler, 1995, p. 12)
Vygotsky's (1978, 1986) socio-cultural framework of the zone of proximal development (ZPD) and
scaffolding writing (Bodrova &amp; Leong, 1995, 1996; Ross, 1976) are used as the theoretical basis to study the
development of second language writing.
Naturalistic approach, Krashen‘s (1982, 1984) theories, the way children learn their first language,
and the apparent ease which they are able to pick up other languages with were acknowledged as relevant to
SLA in general..
Furthermore, certain social and cognitive factors related to second language acquisition indicate that
strategies involved in the language learning process also affect L2 writing. The culture-specific nature of
schemata--abstract mental structures representing our knowledge of things, events, and situations--can lead to
difficulties when students write texts in L2. Knowing how to write a "summary" or "analysis" in Mandarin or
Spanish does not necessarily mean that students will be able to accomplish these in English (Kern, 2000).

8

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Cognitive process of second language learners‘ writings
Cognitive and psychological developments build the background of the individual knowledge is the first
thing that comes to mind when talking about on individual‘s background. Knowledge was deal with the theory of
Piaget‘s as mind and schema, that how infants function in the world surrounds them, how this influences their
mental stability. Learning happens with environmental issues, especially equilibrium. When the infant figure out
a problem, that‘s the infant learns, and the knowledge constructed by the action of that child. Learning comes
with the environment, environment brings the knowledge, and then knowledge brings the acquisitions.
According to the behaviorist school, as opposed to cognitive theory, learning happens through
observable behaviors. The cognitive theory asserts that knowledge is acquired through communication and mind.
Behaviorists come up with a different approach different view stating that learning is a product of stimulusresponse and environment. A neutral stimulus is not responded first. Then later on the organism learns to
respond to stimuli with the help of reinforcement. If this is a positive reinforcement the response repeats. If the
reinforcement is a negative, the response is not likely to repeat. Repetition of this process, that is the response
given to stimuli, affects later learning. This is called positive and negative transfer .Effects of phonology and
morphology of the first language means transfer. Both negative and positive transfer can help the second
language learning. Positive transfer occurs when the rules are used correctly for the second language. Negative
transfer, occurs when the rules are used incorrectly for the second language. Transfers affect the whole system of
learning acquisitions. Cognitive Factors, acquisition is a product of the complex interaction of the linguistic
environment and the learner's internal mechanisms. With practice, there is continual restructuring as learners
shift these internal representations in order to achieve increasing degrees of mastery in L2 (McLaughlin, 1988).
Children invent, interact, react, and extend writing activities throughout the process of literacy acquisition.
Language transfer is another important cognitive factor related to writing error. Transfer is defined as
the influence resulting from similarities and differences between the target language and any other language that
has been previously acquired (Odlin, 1989). The study of transfer involves the study of errors (negative transfer),
facilitation (positive transfer), avoidance of target language forms, and their over-use (Ellis, 1994).
As mentioned previously Vygotsky, regarded language as a critical bridge between the socio-cultural
world and individual mental functioning. According to, Berk &amp; Winsler (1995, p. 12), language is such an
interesting tool that it both provides communication and learning simultaneously. One can communicate while
trying to use a foreign language on the one hand and he/she constantly improves language skills on the other.
Both social and cognitive factors affect language learning. Exploration of social factors gives us some idea of
why learners differ in rate of L2 learning, in proficiency type (for instance, conversational ability versus writing
ability), and in ultimate proficiency (Ellis, 1994).
Writing also involves composing, which implies the ability either to tell or retell pieces of information
in the form of narratives or description, or to transform information into new texts, as in expository or
argumentative writing. Perhaps it is best viewed as a continuum of activities that range from the more
mechanical or formal aspects of "writing down" on the one end, to the more complex act of composing on the
other end (Omaggio Hadley, 1993).
Much of the research on L2 writing has been closely dependent on L1 research. Although L2 writing is
strategically, rhetorically, and linguistically different in many ways from L1 writing (Silva, 1993), L1 models
have had a significant influence on L2 writing instruction and the development of a theory of L2 writing.
However, a look at two popular L1 models will give us some insight into the problem of developing a distinct
construct of L2 writing. [-2-]

Cognitive writing process work
Although it is often said that linguistic ―competence‖ in the sense defined by Chomsky (1965) involves
some kind of ―knowledge‖ of the grammatical rules of a language, this ―knowledge‖ is ordinary out of conscious
awareness … nevertheless, some adolescents and adults (and even some children) can be made to demonstrate an
awareness of the syntactical structure of the sentence they speak … even among adults there are large individual
differences in this ability, and these individual differences are related to successes in learning foreign languages,
apparently because this ability is called upon when the student tries to learn grammatical rules and apply them in
constructing and comprehending new sentences in that language. (pp. 7-8).
Young children who learn a second language bring up all of the knowledge about language learning
they have acquired through developing their first language. For these children, then, second-language acquisition
is not a process of discovering what language is, but rather of discovering what this language is (Tabors, 1997, p.
12).
And also we have to remember the existence of another impact on the L1 and L2 acquisition. The ―talent‖ for
learning foreign language consists of three components. The first is verbal intelligence, by which is meant both

9

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
familiarity with words (this is measured in the Language Aptitude Battery by the ―Vocabulary‖ part) and the
ability to reason analytically about verbal materials (this is measured by the part called ―Language Analysis‖).
The second component is motivation to learn the language … The third component … is called ―auditory ability‖
… (Pimsleur, 1966, p. 182).
There have been many researches that have come up with similar results. Edelsky (1982) analyzed the
relationship between first language and second language writing of young writers in a bilingual contex.The texts
writen by the same children in Spanish and English were analyzed.Edelsky found that a young writer knows
about writing in the first language forms the basisi of new hypotheses for writing in another language.
Furthermore Edelsky argued that certain L1 writing processesa are used in L2 writing .( Cahyono, B.2001)
Moreover, several studies have looked at the effect of composing in the L1 and then translating into
the L2 (Cohen &amp; Brooks-Carson, 2001; Kobayashi &amp; Rinnert, 1994). These studies have found that the lower L2
proficiency writers benefit from composing in the L1 and then translate into the L2, a result that highlights the
importance of using L1 composing strategies for lower L2 proficiency writers.
(Wolfersberger, M.2003)
Besides, at present some thinkers explain the knowledge with intelligence. Especially they are
discussing the concept of multiple intelligence. The capacity of an individual‘s mind and intelligence at the
environment in which person grew up might contribute to person aptitude for literature.

Discussion
Younger children learn grammar of the L2 more slowly than older learners so that although they start
earlier with language learning they make slower progress and overall gains are not straightforwardly link to the
time spend learning (Harley et. al 1995)
The "problem-solving activity" is divided into two major components: the rhetorical situation
(audience, topic, assignment), and the writer's own goals (involving the reader, the writer's persona, the
construction of meaning, and the production of the formal text). By comparing skilled and less-skilled writers,
the emphasis here is placed on "students' strategic knowledge and the ability of students to transform information
. . . to meet rhetorically constrained purposes" (Grabe &amp; Kaplan, 1996, p. 116).
Writing teachers should be aware of how the instrumental motivation of their L2 students will influence
the effectiveness of their lessons. Common purposes for learners writing in an EAP context include writing a
research paper for publication in an English-speaking journal or writing a business report for a multinational
company. These learners may be less motivated to write stories or poetry, because they perceive that these tasks
are not related to their needs. Even writing a standard research essay may seem like a waste of time for those
who will need to write project reports and memos. ( Myles, 2002, vol, 2 no 6)
Keeping in mind all these, young learners need to build up a sound vocabulary enriched with ones‘
culture and background to produce writing, that ways to help basic writers improve their writings. Furthermore,
improving writing skills depend on detailed plan and grammatical knowledge.
Cognitive strategies and working memory capacity became the central focus for analyzing how writing
expertise develops. It became very apparent that the well-developed writing experience comes with working
memory capacity and long-term memory knowledge. Memory capacity improves as writers mature or gain
writing experience.
New learners lack experience in understanding reader‘s purposes, they need the oral language
foundation and, rhetorical skills in order to select the most appropriate pattern through which to present their
content, young learners face with weird characters, vocabulary, grammar and punctuation or inappropriate
content.
Environmental factors may provide a good motivation for one who just begins writing. However,
equally importantly, if not more, inner motivation is also a key for writing.
CONCLUSION
Writing is not an instinctive talent; rather it is acquired later on. During this acquisition process several
factors come into play. Either the way Piaget explains through the solution of environmental problems or
through receiving help, as Vygotsky explains, the most important factors are knowledge and its acquisitions.
Acquisition of knowledge is mostly about individual‘s cognitive process. These primary acquisitions affect the
learning process of the first language. These acquisitions also affect the way a person learns a foreign language
as the individual bases the second language on them. Therefore, the importance of writing becomes clear in the
process of learning a second language.
For those who start writing in a second language, there should be inner and outer factors of motivation
are needed along with socio-cultural impacts.

10

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
References
Berk, L., &amp; Winsler, A. (1995). Scaffolding children.s learning: Vygotsky and early childhood education.
Washington, DC: National Association for the Education of Young Children. (ERIC Document No. ED384443)
Cameron, L.( 2001) Teaching languages to young learners Cambridge University Press 2001
Cahyono, B. Research Studies in Second Language Writing And In Contrastive Rhetoric Volume 3 number 1
(p, 40)
Grabe, W. (2001). Notes toward a theory of second language writing. In T. Silva and P. Matsuda (Eds.), On
second language writing (pp. 39-58). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Kaplan, R. (1987). Cultural thought patterns revisited. In U. Connor &amp; R. Kaplan (Eds.), Writing across
languages: Analysis of L2 text (pp. 9-21). Reading, Mass: Addison Wesley.
Kern, R. (2000). Literacy and language teaching. Hong Kong: Oxford University Press.
Krashen, S. (1982). Principles and practice in second language acquisition. Oxford: Pergamon Press.
Krashen,S (1988) Second Language acquisition University of southern California
McLaughlin, B. (1984). Second language acquisition inchildhood: Vol. 1. Preschool children (2nd ed.).
Hillsdale,NJ: Erlbaum. (ERIC Document No. ED154604)
Odlin, T. (1989). Language transfer. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Piaget, J. (1926). The language and thought of the child.
New York: Meridian Books.
Piaget, J., (1983). Piaget‘s theory. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 1. History, theory,
and methods. New York: Wiley.
Tabors, P. (1997). One child, two languages. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes. (ERIC Document No. ED405987
Srivani, N (Y0342) An integrated approach to how children acquire language Project report (p,7)
Silva, T. (1993). Toward an understanding of the distinct nature of L2 writing: The ESL research and its
implications. TESOL Quarterly, 27, 657-677.
Wolfersberger, M (2003). L1 to L2 Writing Process and Strategy Transfer: A Look at Lower Proficiency
Writers, Vol. 7. No. 2 A-6 September 2003

11

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21933">
                <text>4</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21934">
                <text>COGNITIVE PROCESS OF WRITING FOR SECOND LANGUAGE YOUNG LEARNERS</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21935">
                <text>Pamukcu, Abdullah
Salihovic, Dženan
Akbarov, Azamat</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21936">
                <text>Writing is a pleasant and seminal task, but writing is used as multi-leveled  teaching instruments, but instead difficulties, challenging and cognitively demanding.  Writing requires different skills. Students can improve these skills with some outside  support. In this paper, we will try to demonstrate that writing is not only self product of an  individual, but also an outcome of socio-cultural activity, and a cognitive process. In  particular, answers will be sought for the following questions: What factors do affect the  cognitive process of second language young learners‘ writing? How does schema help in  cognitive writing process? How can basic writers be helped to improve their writings?</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21937">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21938">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="2822" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="3593">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/758ac7f622bcf51e6a71f178d43bfc19.pdf</src>
        <authentication>73e39227639daf57fca387326c15f5a5</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="21932">
                    <text>1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
IRAK’IN YENiDEN YAPILANDIRILMASINDA AİLE EĞİTİMİ ve AİLE
İŞLETMELERİNİN ÖNEMİ VE KATKISI
Zeynel POLAT
Yunus Emre Enstitùsù
ozbekturk04@hotmail.com
Ahmet DĠNÇ
Ishik University
Ahmet24dinc@hotmail.com
Irak, Suudi Arabistan, Kanada ve Ġran‘dan sonra ispatlanmıĢ 115 milyar varilin ùzerinde
petrol rezerviyle dùnyada dôrdùncù sırada yer almaktadır. Tùrkiye‘nin Gùneydoğu
komĢusu olan Irak‘ın kuzeyinde çoğunluğu Kùrtlerden oluĢan Kùrt Bôlgesel Yônetimi
vardır ve onlardan kısaca bahsetmek istiyoruz. Nùfusu yaklaĢık 3 ila 6.5 milyon arasında
değiĢen Duhok, Erbil ve Sùleymaniye valiliklerinden oluĢan bu bôlge yaklaĢık 40,000 km
karedir. Bôlgeyi kalkındırma amaçlı dùzenlemeler 2006 yılından itibaren hayata
geçirilmekte ve yabancı sermayeyi çekebilmeyi amaçlamaktadır. Son yıllarda komĢu
Tùrkiye ile ikili ticari anlaĢmalar artmaktadır.

Bu çalıĢmada baĢlıca Irak genelindeki ve ôzel olarak Kùrt bôlgesel yônetimi içerisindeki
Kuzey Irak bôlgesinde ailenin ônemi ve aile iĢletmelerinin ekonomideki yeri ùzerinde
çalıĢtık. Bu çalıĢmamızda devletten ve ôzel sektôrden, birinci elden bilgi toplama
gayretimizle bu bôlgede bulunmanın avantajını kullanmayı hedefledik. Ama ùlkenin
geçirmiĢ olduğu sıkıntılı ve istikrarsız yapısından kaynaklanan nedenlerden dolayı bilgiye
ve istatistiki dataya ulaĢma sıkıntıları hȃlȃ mevcuttur. Kısaca iktisat tarihine değindikten
sonra iĢletmeler için (aile iĢletmeleri ve yabancı yatırımcıları da kapsayan) gerekli olan
kanuni dùzenlemeler ùzerinde duruldu. Yapılan taramalardan 10‘a yakın aile Ģirketiyle
irtibata geçildi. Onlar hakkında kısa malømatlardan sonra içlerinden birinin yôneticisiyle
irtibat sağlanarak yùz yùze mùlakat yapıldı ve detaylı bilgi alındı. Bu çalıĢmanın amacı
Irak‘ta çok sayıda var olan aile Ģirketlerinin durumu, hangi sektôrde ağırlık kazandıkları,
ikinci veya ùçùncù kuĢak devamı var mı? Ne tùr yasal dùzenlemeler vardır? Sorularına
cevap aramaktır. Bu çalıĢma kısmen Irak geneli ama ôzelde Kuzey Irak bôlgesi aile
eğitimi iĢletmeleri ùzerinde durulmuĢtur. Irak‘ın gùney kısımları Bağdat ve Musul gibi
ônemli kentlere gùvenlik sebebiyle gidip gôzlemleme imkanımız olmadı ama Kuzey‘de

1307

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
bulunan baĢkent Erbil, Sùleymaniye ve Duhok illerinde gùvenliğin varlığından dolayı aile
Ģirketlerini birebir gôzlemleme imkanımız oldu.
Anahtar Kelimeler: Irak, Aile eğitimi, Aile iĢletmesi, Yasal dùzenlemeler, Yeniden
yapılandırma, Katkı

1. GĠRĠġ
Irak, Suudi Arabistan, Kanada ve Ġrandan sonra ispatlanmıĢ petrol rezerviyle dùnyada dôrdùncù sırada
yer almaktadır. DıĢ ticaret gelirinin bùyùk bir bôlùmùnù oluĢturan petrol geliri ùlke ekonomisinde hakim
sektôrdùr. 1980‘lerde Ġran‘la sùren 8 yıllık savaĢ Irak ekonomisinde bùyùk mali kayıplara sebep olurken; Irak,
1968‘den 2003‘e kadar Baas Partisi yônetimi altında idi. Amerika‘nın 2003 yılında koltuğundan ettiği Saddam
Hùseyin 1979‘dan beri ùlkeyi yônetmekteydi. 2009 yılı sayımına gôre ùlkenin nùfusu 31,234,000 kiĢiden oluĢan
Irak vatandaĢlarının çoğunluğu Araplar da olmak ùzere Kùrtler, Asurlular, Mandeans ve Tùrkmenlerden
oluĢmaktadır.
Yabancı ve yerli yatırımcıya kapılarını açan Irak, yeni yatırım kanununu 2006 yılında yùrùrlùğe koydu.
Hùkùmet zor dônemden çıkıĢ yolunu seçebilmek ve ùlke istikrarını sağlayabilmek için ve bu zorlu sùreci baĢarılı
kılmak için yatırıma ağırlık vermektedir. Ülkenin zorlu dônemecini ve bir dizi yeni teĢviklerle yasalarını
yùrùrlùğe koydu. Yabancı yatırımcının yerli yatırımcıdan farkı yoktu. Irak halkının kùltùrù aile iĢletmelerine
yatkın olduğundan çok sayıda aile iĢletmeleri de bu yeni yatırım kanunlarından faydalanmaktadır.
YapmıĢ olduğumuz bu çalıĢmada baĢlıca Irak ve Kuzey‘de bulunan Kùrt bôlgesel yônetiminde aile
ĠĢletmelerini incelemeye çalıĢtık. Irak, 1979‘dan 2003 yılına kadar Saddam Hùseyin‘in kontrolùnde sıkıntılı
gùnler yaĢamaya devam etti. 1980‘lerde baĢlayan ve 10 yıla yakın sùren Ġran-Irak savaĢı, I. ve II. Kôrfez
savaĢları, uluslararası birliklerden uygulanan ambargolar ùlkenin tarihinde ônemli yer teĢkil eden ve
istikrarsızlığın nedenini açıklayan en ônemli geliĢmelerdir. (U.S. Department of State vd. 2010)
Bu çalıĢmamızda Irak aile yapısını inceledik. Bunun ekonomiye katkısı ùzerinde olumlu etkisi olup
olmadığını araĢtırdık. Çùnkù biliniyor ki ùretim faktôrlerinden en ônemlisi iĢ gùcùdùr. SavaĢ ortamında eğitimin
olmaması veya yeterli olmaması sonucu aile içinde yetiĢim veya bùyùklerinden gôrùp yetiĢme halk dilinde
çekirdekten yetiĢme bu eksikliği hangi ôlçùde giderir? Sorusunun cevabını aradık. Irak kùltùrùnde bùyùklerin
ôzellikle de babanın ağırlığının hissedilir ôlçùde olduğu kanaati oluĢtu bizde. SavaĢlarla boğuĢan Irak bu
hengameden çıkıĢ yolu olarak yatırım gôrdùğùnden çalıĢmamızın ikinci kısmını yatırım dùzenlemeleri
almaktadır. Yeni yatırım kanunları teĢvik edici gôrùlmùĢtùr. Üçùncù olarak ôzel sektôrù analiz ettik. Aile
iĢletmelerinin ùlkede hissedilir derece ağırlığının olması Irak kùltùrùyle yakın ilintili olmasından kaynaklandığı
sonucuna vardık.
2.

AĠLE EĞĠTĠMĠ, ÜNĠVERSĠTELER VE BUNLARIN EKONOMĠK KALKINMAYA KATKISI

Irak‘ta nùfusun geneli, Kuzey Irak Kùrt Özerk Bôlgesi‘nde yaĢamaktadır. Bu bôlgede yaĢayan Kùrt
nùfusunun toplam 3 milyon civarında olduğu tahmin edilmektedir. SavaĢ sonrasında genel veya bôlgesel nùfus
sayımı sağlıklı yapılamadığından, bôlgesel nùfus mùbadelesinin veya gôçùĢmenin yoğun Ģekilde yaĢanması
nùfusun tam olarak nekadar olduğunu verememektedir. 1991 ve 2002 yılı sonrası Gùney Irak‘ta yaĢayan halk,
savaĢ tehlikesinin yanında Sùnnî-ġiî tehdidinden kaçarak, Kuzey Irak‘a yerleĢmiĢtir. Bu sebeple Kuzey Özerk
Bôlge‘de karıĢıklıktan uzak durmak isteyen Arap nùfusunda da artıĢ olmuĢtur. Özellikle Bağdat‘ın eğitimde
kendini ıspatlamıĢ ùniversitelerindeki eğitim kadrosu da bu gôçte yerini almıĢ, bu hadise Kuzey Irak‘ın eğitim
alanında gùnden gùne tırmanıĢına yardımcı olmuĢtur. Gôçler sebebi ile Kuzey Irak nùfusu tam olarak
kestirilememektedir.
Kuzey Irak bôlgesinde aile, gelenek ve kùltùrlerine sahip çıkmıĢ bir dùzen içindedir. KomĢularla
iliĢkilerini sıkı tutan, onlarla Kùrt-Ġslam Kùltùrlerini yaĢatma gayreti gôsteren dùĢùnceye sahipler. Genelde kendi
aralarında kız alıp verdikleri gôrùlùr. Bu davranıĢ Ģekli, kendilerini soyutlama anlamında dùĢùnùlmemelidir. Aile
Ģirketinin devamı olarak algılansa, bôlge halkı hakkında sosyo-ekonomik açıdan yaklaĢmıĢ oluruz. Eğitim
reformlarından ônce evlenme yaĢı 15-18‘ lerde iken, reform sonrası ise 20 yaĢın ùzerine çıkmıĢtır. Kuzey Irak‘ta
soy-kabile iliĢkileri korunduğu için sosyo–ekonomik iliĢkilerin yine aile eğitim sistemi dairesinde geliĢip,
korunduğuna Ģahit olmaktayız. Halk da hayatını idame ettiği topraklarda XI.yy. itibari ile gùnùmùze kadar olan
sùreçte eğitimlerini medreselerde devam ettirmiĢtir. Bu sebeple medreseler bôlgedeki halkın ekonomik ve
kùltùrel yaĢam tarzlarına Ģekil vermiĢtir. Dinî ilimlerin yanında mùsbet ilimleri (pozitif ilimler) fizik, kimya,
astronomi, matematik, tıp, coğrafyayı yine bu medreselerde okuyarak kendilerini yetiĢtirmiĢlerdir. Bu medreseler
bilim ve eğitim hayatına kazandırdıkları ile kendi toplumunun sosyal değiĢimine yônelik etkileri gùn yùzùne
çıkmaktadır. Edebiyat alanında da durum bôyledir. TanınmıĢ Kùrt edebiyatçılarına bakıldığında edebî eser

1308

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
sahiplerinin hemen hemen hepsinin medreselerden yetiĢtiğini gôrmekteyiz.353 Kuzey Irak‘ın Eğitim sistemi çok
zayıf gibi gôrùnse de gùnden gùne bu açığını kapatma gayreti, azmi ve çalıĢmaları içindeler. Okur-yazarlık oranı
savaĢ ôncesi ve savaĢ sonrası olmak ùzere iki dôneme ayrılabilir. SavaĢ sebebi ile cephede bulunan veya değiĢik
sebeplerle eğitimini tamamlayamamıĢ halk için gece okulları, dıĢarıdan eğitim, ders geçmede kolaylıklar
sunulmaktadır. SavaĢ sonrası eğitimdeki reformlar ve yeni yaklaĢımlar sonucu, gùnden gùne ôzel ôğretimin de
artmasına, buna bağlı olarak eğitimin doğru orantıda kaliteli olmasına yansımıĢtır. Bu yeni uygulama farklı etnik
ve dinsel kimlikleri birleĢtirici rol oynamaktadır.

Kùrt Özerk Bôlgesi'nden taĢralı bir ilkôğretim ôğrencisi.
Toplumsal ve siyasi çatıĢmaların yaĢandığı toplumlarda daha huzurlu bir hayat yaĢamak için eğitimin rolù hiçbir
zaman yadsınamaz.
2.1 ÇalıĢan kadınlar: Kuzey Irak‘ta yaĢayan nùfusta Erbil, Sùleymaniye gibi bùyùk yerleĢim yerleri
dıĢında kalan yerlerde kadının çalıĢma hayatı içinde daha çok tarım iĢkolu ile sosyal ve kiĢisel hizmetler
iĢkolunda yer aldıkları gôrùlmektedir. Eğitime bağlı olarak kadının iĢ istihdamı gùnden gùne artıĢ
gôstermektedir.
Kuzey Irak Bôlgesel yônetim dahilinde kadının iĢ istihdamı eğitime bağlı olarak değiĢim sùreci içine girmiĢtir.
Bôlgede atılım gôsteren Tùrk iĢverenlerince açılan yeni birimlerde istihdam edilmekteler. Eğitim seviyesi dùĢùk
ve kırsal kesimde olan kiĢiler daha çok tarım ve hayvancılık ile uğraĢmaktadır.

Tùrkiye sınırına yakın bir tarlada çalıĢan Iraklı kôylùler .
2.2
Kamu çalıĢanları: SavaĢ sonrası Kuzey Irak‘ın eğitim seviyesindeki hızlı ilerleme neticesinde
mahalli idareler, doktorluk, hemĢirelik, akademisyenlik, basın - yayın ve ôğretmenlik en çok kabul gôren
mesleklerdir. Bùro iĢi yapma ve devlet memuru olma tercihi yaygın hale gelmektedir. Çağı yakalama
aĢamasında Kuzey Irak Bôlgesi‘nde hizmet eden devlet ve ôzel ùniversiteler bulunmaktadır. Bu ùniversitelerin
baĢında en çok ôğrencisi ile devlet ùniversiteleri Erbil Salahaddin Üniversitesi (Zankoi Salahaddin),
Sùleymaniye Üniv. Kôysancak Üniv. Duhok Üniv. gelirken; çağdaĢ eğitimi ile Erbil ve Irak geneline hizmet
eden ôzel ùniversitelerden Ishık Üniv. Cihan Üniv. Kùrdistan Üniv. gibi ùniversiteler Irak‘ın eğitim, siyasi
dùĢùnce, ekonomik, yapılanmasında bùyùk rol oynamakta, kamu ve ôzel sektôre insan gùcù kazandırmaktadır.

353

Tarih Vakfı tarafından ġubat 2009 – Temmuz 2010 Tarihleri arasında gerçekleĢtirilen ―Toplumsal ve Siyasal ÇatıĢmaların
YaĢandığı Toplumlarda UzlaĢma Aracı Olarak Eğitimin Rolù‖ Projesinde hazırlanan kitap

1309

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo

SavaĢ sonrası eğitim faaliyetlerine hız veren Kuzey Irak, eğitimde kılık kıyafet basta olmak ùzere eğitim ve
ôğretim alanında ôzgùrlùğù de benimsemiĢtir. ùniversite ôğrencileri kendi dinî ve millî kimliklerini aksettiren
kıyafetleri ile derslere devam edebilmektedir.
3.

YENĠDEN YAPILANDIRMADA UYGUN ORTAM VE YASAL DÜZENLEMELER

Yatırım kanunlarıyla dùnya ticaret ôrgùtù içinde yerini almak isteyen Irak yatırımı ve modern
teknoloji transferini gerçekleĢtirebilmek için Irak Hùkùmeti yabancı yatırımcıya bir dizi imtiyazları ve
garantileri kanunlaĢtırdı. Iraklı ve yabancı yatırımcı toplu konut projelerinde yer almaları halinde bakanlığın
onayıyla ulusal komisyon tarafından Ģartları belirlenmiĢ Ģekilde toprağı kullanma hakkına sahip oldular. Toprak
sahibinin spekùlasyon hareketi kontrol altına alındı. Komisyon toplu konut projesi için gerekli toprağın alımını
da kolaylaĢtırdı. Yerli ve yabancı yatırımcılar bu kanunlardan nasıl fayda gôrecekler sorusunun cevaplarını Ģôyle
sıralayabiliriz:
1- Kanuna gôre yatırımcı dıĢardan aldığı ve vergisini ôdediği kapitali çıkarabilecektir.
2- Yabancı yatırmcı borsadan bono ve hisse alabilecek.
3- 50 yıla kadar toprak kiralayabilecek.
4- Proje, yerli veya yabancı sigorta Ģirketine sigortalabilinir.
5- Irak içinde veya dıĢında Irak Dinarı veya istenilen para cinsinden hesap açılabilir.
6- Irak‘ta çalıĢtırılacak iĢçi için firmanın isteği doğrultusunda istenilen ùlke vatandaĢı iĢçi olarak kabul
gôrùp ikamet izni alabilecek.
7- Irak‘ta çalıĢan iĢçiler maaĢlarını kendi ùlkelerine transfer yapabilirler.
Irak hùkùmetinin onayladığı bu yeni yatırım kanunları hem yerli hem yabancı yatırımcılar için
geçerlidir. Yine bu teĢvik kanununda 10 yıllık vergi muafiyeti vardır. Eğer yabancı firma bir Iraklı ortağa
sahipse ve yerli ortağın hissesi %50 den fazla ise 10 yıllık vergi muafiyeti 15 yıla çıkar. Hastahane, turizm
bùrosu, otel, sağlık kuruluĢu, rehabilitasyon merkezi, bilim merkezi vb. yatırımlar da yurt dıĢından getireceği
ofis mobilyaları ve benzeri ithal mallardan vergi alınmayacaktır. Bu kanunlar Kuzey Irak Yônetimi bôlgesi için
geçerli kanunlar değildir. Kuzey Irak Bôlgesel Yônetiminin kendine has kanuni dùzenlemeleri mevcuttur.
(Saiflaw, 2010) 2006 yatırım kanunu yatırımcılara hak ve sorumluluklar yùklemektedir. Yatırım için kurulan
ulusal komisyon yatırım lisansı vermektedir. 7. maddeye gôre baĢvuru yapıldıktan sonraki 45 gùn içinde
komisyon lisans verme kararını veriyor. Eğer yatırım projesi 250 milyon doları geçiyorsa lisansa baĢvurmak için
bakanlar kurulunun onayı gerekir. 12. Maddede yabancı yatırımcıların ve iĢçilerin Irak‘a giriĢ-çıkıĢ kolaylığı
belirtilmektedir. Bu kanunda Irak vatandaĢı iĢçilerin istihdam edilmesine ôncelik verildiği de vurgulanmıĢtır. 14.
Maddeye gôre yatırımcı ekonomik ve teknik kolaylığı olan uygun yatırım kontratı sağlamalıdır. Yatırıma
baĢlama tarihi ve iĢ planının aĢamaları bildirilmelidir ve bildirilen Ģartlara uygun hareket edilmelidir. 15.-18.
Maddelerde bir dizi yatırım muafiyetleri var. Yukarıda bahsedildiği gibi bunların baĢında 10 yıllık vergi
muafiyeti yer almaktadır. 21. Madde yatırımın Ģeklini tanımlamaktadır; ôdeme, aktiflerin değeri, gereçler ve
teknik ustalık, patent ve hizmetleri içeren hakların tanımı vardır. Uluslararası yatırım sôzleĢmelerinde bulunan
yatırımın tarifi baz alınmıĢtır. Yatırımcı ne çeĢit ve hangi sektôrde yatırım yapacağının farkında olmalıdır. 27.
Madde, anlaĢmazlık halinde Irak mahkemelerine yargılama hakkı verir. 30. Madde bakanlar kuruluna kanunu
yùrùrlùğe koyma yetkisi verir. (Iraq LegalGuide, 2010)
Yatırımcılar hȃlȃ gùvenliği ônde tutan bir dùĢùnceyle hareket etmektedirler. 2008‘den 2010‘a geçerken
ve bugùnlerde bile oteller ve devlet dairelerini hedef alan bombalama hadiseleri mevcuttur. Ama bu hadiseler
ônceki yıllara nazaran dùĢmeye devam etmektedir. Bu dùĢùĢ durumu bile Irak devletine, ôzel sektôre ve
yabancı Ģirketlere Irak‘ta yatırım imkanı tanımaktadır. Irak hùkùmeti baĢta petrol olmak ùzere birçok

1310

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
yabancı Ģirketle anlaĢmıĢ ve lisans vermiĢtir. Yapılan kontratlar Irak‘ın petrol ihraç kapasitesini son 7 yılda
%500 arttırabilir niteliktedir. (Stategov, 2010) Bùyùk Ģirketlerin yanında kùçùk ve orta ôlçekli iĢletmeler,
gùvenlik maliyeti, hantal ve ĢaĢırtıc prosedùr, devletin yatırım karĢılığı ôdeyeceği meblağın uzun vadeli olması
gibi zorluklarla karĢılaĢılabilir. Dùnya bankasının yaptığı dùnyada en kolay iĢ yapma sıralamasında ırak 183
ùlkeden 153. Arap ùlkeleri arasında ise 16.sıradadır. (The World Bank, 2010)
Bu sayılan zorluklar Irak‘ın Kuzey bôlgesel yônetiminde gôrùlmemektedir. Irakın kuzeyinde gùvenlik
problemi olmamakla birlikte bôlgesel yônetimin yatırım teĢvikleri de vardır. Kuzeyde bulunan bôlgesel
yônetim baĢkent Erbil olmak ùzere Sùleymaniye ve Duhok Ģehirlerinden oluĢmaktadır. Bôlge 40.000 km2
alanıyla Irak‘ın %18‘ini oluĢturmaktadır. Bôlgede yaĢayan Kùrt nùfusun yaklaĢık 3 milyon olduğu tahmin
edilmektedir. Yer altı kaynakları bakımından bôlge zengin petrol ve gaz rezervlerinin yanında kômùr, demir ve
bakır rezervlerine de sahiptir. Bôlgenin gùvenlik sorunu olmaması yatırımın çekilmesinde baĢlıca sebeptir.
Irak‘ta veya Kuzey Irak‘ta yatırım yapmak isteyen yerli ve yabancı yatırımcılar için bu bôlge adeta giriĢ-çıkıĢ
kapısı rolù de gôrmektedir. Bôlgenin Ġran-Tùrkiye-Suriye‘ye sınırı olması Irak için adeta kapı konumunda
olmasını ve ticarette de ùstùnlùk sağlıyor. Bôlgenin daha gùvenli olması sebebiyle yerli ve yabancı
yatırımcıların dikkatini çekmiĢ ve bu da kiĢi baĢına dùĢen gelirin artmasıyla sonuçlanmıĢtır. 2007 yılında kiĢi
baĢına gelir 2300 - 2500 Dolar‘dan (Fathi M. Ali Abdullah, 2007) 2010 yılına gelindiğinde 3300 - 4500
Dolar‘a kadar çıktığı gôzlemlenmiĢtir. (Fathi M. Ali- Mudaris, 2010)
-

Yeni dùzenlemede yabancı firmaların yerli ortağı olma ihtiyacı ortadan kaldırıldı.
Yabancı yatırımcıya Iraklı biri gibi ùlkede firma kurma kolaylığı getirildi.

Erbil, Sùleymaniye ve Bağdat merkezli ùç ayrı yerde yatırım yaptırmak isteyenler için kayıt yeri vardır. Kayıt
yaptırmak isteyen firma avukatlar birliğine ùye bir avukat tutmak zorundadır. Yabancı yatırımcı herhangi bir
Iraklı vatandaĢın haklarına sahipçesine firmasını Kuzey yônetim bôlgesinde kurabilir. Yabancı firma, yerli veya
aile Ģirketi olması herhangi bir fark gerektirmemektedir.
1-Ülkesinde kayıtlı olan herhangi bir yabancı firma kayıtlı olduğu sertifikası, Irak bùyùkelçiliğinde veya Kuzey
bôlgesel yônetiminin temsilciliği varsa onun mùhrùyle mùhùrlenmelidir.
2-KuruluĢ sertifikasının bir fotokopisi veya kurulduğu ùlkedeki resmi otoritede onaylı tùm belgeler kurucular
veya temsilci tarafından imzalanmalı ve Irak elçiliği tarafından mùhùrlenmeli.
3-ġube açacak firmanın kurucu ùyeleri kiĢiyi (yônetici-avukat-iĢçi) resmi bir yazıyla atamalı ve bu atama yazısı
Irak elçiliği tarafından onaylanmalı. (Atanan insanların bôlgesel yônetimden oturum izni almalıdır.)
4-Yabancı firmanın atadığı kiĢi hakkında yetkililere doğru bilgi verilmelidir.
5-Merkez firmanın son yılın finansal raporları Irak elçiliği tarafından onaylanmalı.
6-Tùm gerekli resmi evraklar Ġngilizce ve Arapça olmalıdır. Bu evraklar Irak elçiliği tarafından onaylanmalıdır.
7-Kayıt ùcreti 200.000 Irak dinarıdır.
8-Kuzey Irak Bôlgesel Kùrt Yônetimi‘ndeki Ģirketin kira sôzlenmesi.
9-SôzleĢmede belirtilen Ģirketin faaliyet alanı hakkında bilgi verilmelidir.
10-Tutulan barolar birliğine kayıtlı avukatın kontratı ve muhasebeciler birliğine kayıtlı muhasebe yetkilisinin
kontratı belirtilmelidir.
11-Gerekli formlar doldurulmalıdır. (formlar websitesinde mevcuttur -www.br-iraq.com-) (Fathi M. Ali
Abdullah, 2007)
Özel ve aile Ģirketlerini ilgilendiren bazı kanunlardan ve dùzenlemelerden bahsedersek: 1997 yılında 21
numaralı bu kanun 2003 yılında değiĢime uğradı.
A-ġirket Kayıt Kanunu; 1- Kaydını yaptıran Ģirket yabancı veya yerli olsun ayrım yoktur.
2- Yabancılar Ģirketin %100‘ ùne sahip olabilirler. Yani yabancı Ģirket için yerli
ortakla iĢ yapmak zorunluluğu olmayacaktır.
3- ġirket çeĢitli sektôrlerde aynı anda iĢ yapabilecektir.
4- Yabancı iĢçi çalıĢtırabilecektir.
B-Sanayi GeliĢimi Kanunu; 1-ġirketler fabrika kurabilirler.
2- Ġmal edeceği ùrùnùn ôn fizibilite çalıĢması sunulmalıdır.
3- Yetkililer fabrika için dùĢùk maliyetli toprak sağlamasında kolaylık gôstereceklerdir
ve hammade sağlanması için lisans verilecektir.
C- Ticaret ve sanayi bakanlığı yerli ve yabancı Ģirketler için ithalat ve ihracaat lisansını bir yıllığına verecektir
gerektiğinde bu sùre uzatılabilecektir. Ġthal mallardan; gıda, ilaç, tıbbi malzeme, kitap ve kırtasiye, inĢaat
malzemeleri, çimento ve çelik hariç % 5 vergi vardır. (Fathi M. Ali Abdullah, 2007)

1311

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
4. AĠLE ĠġLETMELERĠNĠN SEKTÖREL ANALĠZĠ VE ÜLKE KALKINMASINA
KATKISI
Aile iĢletmeleri ùlke ekonomisinde bùyùk bir yer tutmakta ve ùlke ekonomisinin belkemiğini
oluĢturmaktadır. Dùnya genelinde iĢletmelerin %65 ila %80‘inin aile iĢletmesi olduğu tahmin edilmektedir.
Fortune Dergisinin ilk 500 listesinde % 40‘ını aile iĢletmeleri oluĢturmaktadır. (Ward vd, 2001: 3)
Amerika‘daki iĢletmelerin % 90‘ı aile Ģirketlerinden oluĢmaktadır. Ayrıca aile iĢletmelerinin Amerika‘nın gayri
safi milli hasılasındaki ve tùm çalıĢanlara ôdenen ùcretlerdeki payı da yùzde 50 dir. (Bowman-Upton, 1991).
Tùrkiye‘deki aile iĢletmelerinin oranı da yùzde 95 civarındadır. (Erdil vd, 2004, 2) Aile iĢletmeleri bir ailedeki
bireylerinin sorumluluğu, kontrolù ve ortaklığı içerisindeki iĢletmelerdir. Aile iĢletmelerinin tanımlanması ile
ilgili gôrùĢ farklılıkları olsa da ortak intiba aile iĢletmelerinin hisselerinin bùyùk çoğunluğunun aile bireylerine
ait olması yanında yônetim biçim ve tarzının da aile fertleri tarafından belirlendiği iĢletmeler olduğu kanısı ortak
dùĢùncedir. (Pazarcık, 2004: 2-3)
Bu tanım ıĢığında aile iĢletmeleri aile içinden bir kuĢaktan diğer kuĢağa devredilebilen iĢletmeler olarak
da tanımlanmaktadır. Yônetimin devri aile iĢletmesinin yaĢamında ônemli bir dônùm noktasıdır. Aile
iĢletmelerinin en ônemli sorunlarından biri sùreklilik ve gelecek planlamasıdır. Ġstatistikler de devir iĢleminin
tipik sorunlu bir konu olduğunu doğrulamaktadır. Yapılan araĢtırmalar ùçte birinden daha az oranda aile
iĢletmesinin 1. kuĢaktan 2. kuĢağa geçebildiğini, bunların ise ancak yarısının 3. kuĢağı gôrebildiklerini ortaya
koymaktadır. (Bowman-Upton, 1991) Aile tarafından kurulmuĢ ve bu ôzelliğini yitirmeden yùzyılı aĢkın sùredir
baĢarı ile ayakta kalmıĢ birçok Ģirket vardır. Bu tùr Ģirketlerin dùnya ôrnekleri arasında Bosch, Prada, Miele, De
Beers, Tùrkiye ôrnekleri icinde de Hacı Bekir, Kurukahveci Mehmet Efendi, Komili ve Konyalı sayılabilir.
Ekonomik yapı geliĢmeler ıĢığında değerlendirildiğinde Irak ekonomik yônden incelendiğinde
istikrarsızlıklar gôzlemlenmektedir. 1980‘lerde Irak-Ġran SavaĢı, 1990‘larda Kuveyt‘in iĢgali ùzerine baĢlayan
uluslararası askeri harekat ve 2003 yılında Amerika‘nın askeri mùdahalesinin dônùm noktasını teĢkil ettiği son
30 yılda Irak ekonomisi oldukça istikrarsız bir yapı sergilemiĢtir. Çesitli dônemlerde yùrùrlùğe konan ekonomik
ambargolar da Irak‘ın uluslararası ekonomiye entegrasyonunu gùçlestirmistir. 1991 – 1995 yılları arasında
BirleĢmiĢ Milletler (BM) tarafından Irak‘a sunulan petrol karĢılığı gıda ithalatı ônerisi, Irak Hùkùmeti tarafından
kabul gôrmemiĢ ve petrol geliri elde edilemediği için ùlkede fakirlik hızla artmıĢtır. 1996 yılında, Irak Hùkùmeti,
BM tarafından ônerilen Gıda KarĢılığı Petrol Programı (OFF) ônerisini kabul etmek durumunda kalmıĢtır.
Bu programla, Irak hùkùmetine sınırlı miktarda petrol ihraç etme ve bunun karĢılığında gıda ve insani
malzeme ithal etme izni verilmiĢtir. 22 Mayıs 2003 tarihinde, BM Gùvenlik Konseyi 1483 Sayılı kararı kabul
etmiĢ ve Irak ùzerindeki tùm ticari yaptırımların bittiğini ilan ederek, OFF programını yùrùrlùkten kaldırmıĢtır.
Amerika‘nın askeri mùdahalesinin ardından kurulan Irak‘ın Yeniden Yapılandırılması ve Ġnsani Yardım Kurumu
(ORHA- Yeniden ĠnĢaa ve Ġnsani Yardım Ofisi) ùlkede idari ve ekonomik yapıyı yeniden oluĢturmakla
gôrevlendirilmistir. Bununla birlikte, 2003 yılında Irak ekonomisi savaĢın ve savaĢ sonrası gùvenlik durumunun
kôtùleĢmesinin yanı sıra ùlkedeki devlet kurumlarının tamamına yakınının tasfiye edilmesi, gerekli idarelerinin
tesis edilememesi ve artan istikrasızlık gibi nedenlerle kôtùye gitmistir. (Deik, 2010: 3)
Kùrt bôlgesel yônetiminin tarihi ve ekonomik yônùnù de kısaca izah etmemizde fayda mùlahaza ettik.
Kuzey yônetimi ôzerkliğini 11 Mart 1970‘te yapılan anlaĢmayla merkezi hùkùmetten almıĢtır. Ancak bu durum
3 sene sùrmùĢ ve anlaĢma 1974 yılında dùĢmùĢtùr. Bôlge yônetimi 1991 yılı Ekim ayında de facto (fiili) olarak
ôzerkliğini almıĢtır. 2005 yılında da Geçici Irak Yônetimi tarafından tam ôzerklik verilmiĢtir. (U.S. Department
of State vd. 2010)
Kuzey Bôlgesel Yônetiminin ekonomisi petrol baĢta olmak ùzere tarım ve turizm gelirlerine
dayanmaktadır. Bu yônetimin altındaki ùç yôresel idare (Duhok, Erbil ve Sùleymaniye) Amerikan ordusu
tarafından tùm Irak‘ta ―gùvenli‖ kabul edilen tek yerlerdir. Bu durum bôlgenin Irak‘ın diğer yerlerine gôre daha
fazla geliĢmesine ve yatırımın bu alanda yoğunlaĢmasını sağlamıĢtır. Bôlge yônetimi Saddam Hùseyin
dôneminde BM‘in uyguladığı ―Gıda için Petrol‖ programı çerçevesinde alınan petrol gelirlerinin yùzde 13‘ùnù
almaktaydı. Bu oran Ģimdilerde yùzde 17‘ye çıkmıĢtır. Bôlgede 2003 yılında Amerikan çıkarması baĢladığı
andan itibaren koalisyon askerine karĢılık bir giriĢim vuku bulmamıĢtır. Ayrıca yeni çıkartılan yatırım teĢvik
kanunlarında kuzey bôlgesi cazip bir duruma gelmiĢ ve kısa zamanda yùzlerce yeni yatırımcı gelerek onlarca
yeni firma kurmaya baĢlamıĢtır. (KRG vd, 2010)
Tablo 1‘de 2004 yılında Irak Planlama ve Kalkınma Bakanlığının hazırladığı raporda Amerikan çıkarması
ôncesindeki resmi olarak Aile ĠĢletmelerinin sayısı ve hangi illerde kurulduğunu gôrebiliriz.

1312

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
Tablo 1. Iraktaki Aile ĠĢletmeleri Sayısı ve Faaliyet Yerleri
YERĠ
AĠLE ĠġLETMELERĠ
Amara
10
Bakuba
17
Bağdat
6
Basra
2
Divaniye
16
Dohuk
9
Erbil
4
Hilla
21
Kerbela
12
Kerkùk
3
Kut
21
Musul
11
Necef
4
Nasariye
2
Ramadi
25
Selahaddin
25
Samava
10
Sùlemaniye
16
Kaynak: Irak YaĢam Standardları ÇalıĢması, 2004 BirleĢmiĢ Milletler GeliĢim Programı ve Ġstatistik ve Bilim
Teknoloji Merkez TeĢkilatı Irak Planlama ve Kalkınma Bakanlığı.
Tablo 1‘den gôrùldùğù ùzere resmi olarak faaliyette olan aile iĢletmelerinin sayısı çok azdır. Firmaların bùyùk
bir çoğunluğu 1. veya 2. kuĢak iĢletmeleridir. Bunun nedeni yukarda açıklandığı ùzere istikrarsızlıktan
kaynaklanması olabilir. Yaptığımız araĢtırmalar sonucunda çok az sayıdaki firmanın 3. kuĢak tarafından idare
edildiği gôzlemlenmektedir.

SONUÇ

Yaptığımız açıklamalar ıĢığında değerlendirildiğinde hem Irak genelinde hem de Kuzey Bôlgesel
Yônetim alanında ticaret ve ekonominin 2003 yılı ôncesinde istenilen seviyede geliĢme gôstermediğini
anlayabiliriz. Irak‘ta kurulan iĢletmelerin tùm dùnya genelinde olduğu gibi bùyùk oranını aile iĢletmeleri teĢkil
etmektedir. Irak aile yapısı da bunu beslemekte ve aile bireylerinin birbirilerini iĢ partnerleri olarak gôrmesi de
hemen hemen kurulan bùtùn iĢletmelerin aile iĢletmesi olarak kurulmasına yol açmaktadır. (Metz, 1988: 44)
Toplumsal ve siyasal çalkalanmaların yaĢandığı toplumlarda eğitimin rolù bùyùktùr. Bu sebeple
ùniversite destekli aile eğitiminin ùlke kalkınmasına katkısı çoktur. ġu anda bile Irak devleti savaĢ ortamında
olduğundan dolayı gùçlù bir aile eğitimi ihtiyacı ôn plana çıkmaktadır. Bôlgede faaliyet gôsteren devlet ve ôzel
ùniversitelerin savaĢ sonrası için eğitimli, tam techizatlı personel ihtiyacını karĢılama vazifesi bilinci içinde olup,
ona gôre hareket etmelilerdir.

1313

�1st International Conference on Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics
May 5-7 2011 Sarajevo
REFERENCES
The World Bank, Doing Business in the Arab World, International Finance Corporation, Abu Dhabi, 2010, p. 14
Fathi M. Ali Abdullah, Kurdıstan The commercial gateway to Iraq, Ministry of Trade &amp; Industry, Minara
publishing house, Erbil, 2007
Fathi M. Ali- Mudaris, A short guide to the KRG‘s trade policies, regulations and procedures, Ministry of trade
&amp; Industry, Erbil, 2010
Erdil, Oya, Çiğerim ErĢan ve Gôk ġahin (2004) ―Aile ĠĢletmelerinde Yônetim Biçimleri Üzerine Bir Literatùr
AraĢtırması‖ Aile ĠĢletmeleri Kongresi, Kongre Kitabı 2.Baskı s. 2
Pazarcık, Orhan (2004), ―Aile iĢletmelerinin Tanımı KurumsallaĢması ve YônetiĢimi‖ AĠK 04 1. Aile ĠĢletmeleri
Kongresi, Kongre Kitabi 2. Baskı, syf 2-3.
Nancy Bowman-Upton 1991, ―Transferring Management in the Family-Owned Business‖, U.S. Small Business
Administration.
U.S. Department of State, Bureau of Near Eastern Affairs,
http://www.state.gov/r/pa/ei/bgn/6804.htm#profile [EriĢim 1.9.2010]
Deik 2010, Irak Ülke Bùlteni ġubat 2010,
http://www.deik.org.tr/Lists/Bulten/Attachments/130/Irak%20Ulke%20Bulteni,%20Nisan%202010_TR.pdf,
[EriĢim 11.9.2010]
KRG, (2010), Kurdistan Regional Government Fact Sheets,
http://www.krg.org/articles/detail.asp?rnr=272&amp;lngnr=12&amp;smap=01060100&amp;anr=25488[EriĢim 11.9.2010]
Randel S. Carlock ve Prof. John L. Ward(2001), Strategic Planning for The Family Business: Parallel Planning
to Unify the Family and Business, Palgrave)
Metz, Helen Chapin(1988), Iraq: A Country Study, Family and Society, Washington: GPO for the
Library O f Congress, p44-45.
www.saiflaw.com/iraq.html, EriĢim, 08.08.2010)
(http://trade.gov/iraq/LegalGuide2008.asp, EriĢim, 02. 08. 2010)
(www.state.gov/e/eeb/rls/othr/ics/2010/138084.htm, EriĢim, 25.07.2010)

1314

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21926">
                <text>681</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21927">
                <text>IRAK’IN YENiDEN YAPILANDIRILMASINDA AİLE EĞİTİMİ ve AİLE  İŞLETMELERİNİN ÖNEMİ VE KATKISI</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21928">
                <text>POLAT, Zeynel
DİNÇ, Ahmet</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21929">
                <text>Irak, Suudi Arabistan, Kanada ve Ġran‘dan sonra ispatlanmıĢ 115 milyar varilin ùzerinde  petrol rezerviyle dùnyada dôrdùncù sırada yer almaktadır. Tùrkiye‘nin Gùneydoğu  komĢusu olan Irak‘ın kuzeyinde çoğunluğu Kùrtlerden oluĢan Kùrt Bôlgesel Yônetimi  vardır ve onlardan kısaca bahsetmek istiyoruz. Nùfusu yaklaĢık 3 ila 6.5 milyon arasında  değiĢen Duhok, Erbil ve Sùleymaniye valiliklerinden oluĢan bu bôlge yaklaĢık 40,000 km  karedir. Bôlgeyi kalkındırma amaçlı dùzenlemeler 2006 yılından itibaren hayata  geçirilmekte ve yabancı sermayeyi çekebilmeyi amaçlamaktadır. Son yıllarda komĢu  Tùrkiye ile ikili ticari anlaĢmalar artmaktadır.  Bu çalıĢmada baĢlıca Irak genelindeki ve ôzel olarak Kùrt bôlgesel yônetimi içerisindeki  Kuzey Irak bôlgesinde ailenin ônemi ve aile iĢletmelerinin ekonomideki yeri ùzerinde  çalıĢtık. Bu çalıĢmamızda devletten ve ôzel sektôrden, birinci elden bilgi toplama  gayretimizle bu bôlgede bulunmanın avantajını kullanmayı hedefledik. Ama ùlkenin  geçirmiĢ olduğu sıkıntılı ve istikrarsız yapısından kaynaklanan nedenlerden dolayı bilgiye  ve istatistiki dataya ulaĢma sıkıntıları hȃlȃ mevcuttur. Kısaca iktisat tarihine değindikten  sonra iĢletmeler için (aile iĢletmeleri ve yabancı yatırımcıları da kapsayan) gerekli olan  kanuni dùzenlemeler ùzerinde duruldu. Yapılan taramalardan 10‘a yakın aile Ģirketiyle  irtibata geçildi. Onlar hakkında kısa malømatlardan sonra içlerinden birinin yôneticisiyle  irtibat sağlanarak yùz yùze mùlakat yapıldı ve detaylı bilgi alındı. Bu çalıĢmanın amacı  Irak‘ta çok sayıda var olan aile Ģirketlerinin durumu, hangi sektôrde ağırlık kazandıkları,  ikinci veya ùçùncù kuĢak devamı var mı? Ne tùr yasal dùzenlemeler vardır? Sorularına  cevap aramaktır. Bu çalıĢma kısmen Irak geneli ama ôzelde Kuzey Irak bôlgesi aile  eğitimi iĢletmeleri ùzerinde durulmuĢtur. Irak‘ın gùney kısımları Bağdat ve Musul gibi  ônemli kentlere gùvenlik sebebiyle gidip gôzlemleme imkanımız olmadı ama Kuzey‘de  bulunan baĢkent Erbil, Sùleymaniye ve Duhok illerinde gùvenliğin varlığından dolayı aile  Ģirketlerini birebir gôzlemleme imkanımız oldu.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21930">
                <text>2011-05</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="21931">
                <text>Conference or Workshop Item
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="32">
        <name>P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
</itemContainer>
